Carrier 30XW150-400 User Manual

Download

Page 1

AQUAFORCE

30XW150-400

Water-Cooled Liquid Chillers

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service

and Troubleshooting

CONTENTS

Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Conventions Used in This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Display Module Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

• TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY

• NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE

CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Compressor Protection Module (CPM) . . . . . . . . . . 10

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board . . . . . . . . 13

MLV/Condenser Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch (SW1). . . . . . . 16

Emergency On/Off Switch (SW2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Local Equipment Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Board Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Touch Pilot Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Control Module Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

•RED LED

• GREEN LED

• YELLOW LED

Carrier Comfort Network

Remote Alarm and Alert Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-46

Touch Pilot Operation Configuration Tables. . . . . 18

Machine Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Machine On/Off Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

• TOUCH PILOT MACHINE CONTROL

• NAVIGATOR DISPLAY MACHINE CONTROL

Entering Fluid Control Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Cooling Set Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

• SET POINT OCCUPANCY

Chilled Water Fluid Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

• FRESH WATER

• BRINE OR GLYCOL OPERATION

Cooler Pump Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

• COOLER PUMP CONTROL CONFIRGURATIONS

Machine Start Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Circuit/Compressor Staging and Loading . . . . . . . 29

• CIRCUIT/COMPRESSOR STAGING

• CIRCUIT/COMPRESSOR LOADING

Minimum Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Dual Chiller Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

• DUAL CHILLER CONTROL FOR PARALLEL APPLICATIONS

• DUAL CHILLER PUMP CONTROL FOR PARALLEL CHILLER APPLICATIONS

• DUAL CHILLER CONTROL FOR SERIES APPLICATIONS

• DUAL CHILLER PUMP CONTROL FOR SERIES CHILLER APPLICATIONS

(CCN) Interface. . . . . . . 18

Page

Ramp Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

• RETURN WATER RESET

• SPACE TEMPERATURE RESET

• 4-20 mA TEMPERATURE RESET

Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

• SWITCH CONTROLLED DEMAND LIMIT

• EXTERNALLY POWERED CAPACITY BASED DEMAND LIMIT

• EXTERNALLY POWERED CURRENT BASED DEMAND LIMIT

• CCN LOADSHED CONTROLLED DEMAND LIMIT

Ice Storage Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Broadcast Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

•ACTIVATE

• BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER

Alarm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

• ALARM ROUTING CONTROL

• ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY

• COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME

• RE-ALARM TIME

• ALARM SYSTEM NAME

Daylight Saving Time Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Capacity Control Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

• LOW CONDENSER FLUID TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL OPTION

PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46,47

System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47-53

Actual Start-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

• TEMPERATURES

•VOLTAGE

• MINIMUM FLUID LOOP VOLUME

• FLOW RATE REQUIREMENTS

OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-59

Sequence of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

•PUMP OPERATION

Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

• THERMISTORS

• TRANSDUCERS

SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-67

Economizer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

• MAIN EXV CONTROL

• ECONOMIZER EXV CONTROL

• EXV TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

Compressor Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

• COMPRESSOR OIL SYSTEM

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300024-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30XW-1T Pg 1 11-09 Replaces: New

Page 2

CONTENTS (cont)

Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

• SUCTION SERVICE VALVE

• LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE

• LOSS OF FLUID FLOW PROTECTION

• TUBE PLUGGING

•RETUBING

• TIGHTENING COOLER HEAD BOLTS

• INSPECTING/CLEANING HEAT EXHANGERS

• WATER TREATMENT

• CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH

Refrigerant Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

• LEAK TESTING

• REFRIGERANT CHARGE

Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

• COMPRESSOR PROTECTION

• COOLER PROTECTION

Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

• PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . 67

TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67-85

Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

• DIAGNOSTIC ALARM CODES AND POSSIBLE CAUSES

Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™

DISPLAY TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86-104

APPENDIX B — NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY

TAB LE S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-117

APPENDIX C — CCN TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118-132

APPENDIX D — 30XW150-400 CPM

DIP SWITCH ADDRESSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,134

APPENDIX E — PIPING AND

INSTRUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 136

APPENDIX F — GLOBAL TIME SCHEDULE

CONFIGURATION FOR i-Vu

CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137-139

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

START-UP CHECKLIST

FOR 30XW LIQUID CHILLERS . . . . . . . . CL-1 to CL-7

DEVICE AND CSM

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and equipment location. Only trained, qualified installers and service technicians should install, start up, and service this equipment. When working on this equipment, observe precautions in the literature, on tags, stickers, and labels attached to the equipment, and any other safety precautions that apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use care in handling, rigging, and setting this equipment, and in handling all electrical components.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut off all power to this equipment during installation and service. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all disconnect locations to alert others not to restore power until work is completed.

WARNING

DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building. Outlet from relief valves must be vented in accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE (American National Standards Institute/American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) 15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.

WARNING

DO NOT attempt to unbraze factory joints when servicing this equipment. Compressor oil is flammable and there is no way to detect how much oil may be in any of the refrigerant lines. Cut lines with a tubing cutter as required when performing service. Use a pan to catch any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage for how much oil to add to system. DO NOT re-use compressor oil.

CAUTION

This unit uses a microprocessor-based electronic control system. Do not use jumpers or other tools to short out components, or to bypass or otherwise depart from recommended procedures. Any short-to-ground of the control board or accompanying wiring may destroy the electronic modules or electrical components.

CAUTION

To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger tubes, always run fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing refrigerant charge. Use appropriate antifreeze solutions in evaporator and condenser fluid loops to prevent the freezing of heat exchangers or interconnecting piping when the equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32 F (0° C). Proof of flow switch is factory installed on all models. Do NOT remove power from this chiller during winter shut down periods without taking precaution to remove all water from heat exchangers. Failure to properly protect the system from freezing may constitute abuse and may void warranty.

CAUTION

Compressors require specific rotation. Swap any two incoming power leads to correct compressor rotation.

Page 3

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ALARM INDICATOR

LIGHT STA RT- STOP BUTTON

LCD TOUCH SCREEN

Fig. 1 — Touch Pilot™ Display

a30-4456 (b&w)

GENERAL

This publication contains controls, operation, start-up, service and troubleshooting information for the 30XW150-400 water-cooled liquid chillers with electronic controls. The 30XW chillers are equipped with ComfortLink™ controls and electronic expansion valves. The AquaForce

30XW chillers offer two different user interface devices, the Touch Pilot™ display and the Navigator ™ display.

Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-

ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the Navigator module and Touch Pilot display will be used in this manual.

Point names for the Touch Pilot display will be shown in bold. See Appendix A for a complete list of point names. Item names for the Navigator module will be shown in bold italics. See Appendix B for the complete path name preceding the item name. The point and item names in Appendices A and B will be listed in alphabetical order and the path name for each will be written with the mode name first, then any sub-modes, each separated by an arrow symbol ( .

This path name will show the user how to navigate through the Navigator module or the Touch Pilot display to reach the desired configuration. The user would scroll through the modes and submodes using the and keys on the Navigator display. For the Touch Pilot display, the user would simply touch the menu item on the screen. The arrow symbol in the path name represents pressing to move into the next level of the menu structure for the Navigator module, or touching the menu item on the screen for the Touch Pilot display.

When a value is included as part of the point name, it will be shown after the point name after an equals sign. If the value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will be shown in parentheses after the value. The Touch Pilot name will be shown first with the Navigator name following. As an example, (Staged Loading Sequence = 1, LLCS = Circuit A leads).

Press the and keys simultaneously on the Navigator module to display an expanded text description of the point name or value. The expanded description is shown in the Navigator display tables (Appendix B) but will not be shown with the path names in text. The Touch Pilot display will show an expanded description of the point name. To view the expanded point name for the Touch Pilot display go to Appendix A.

The Touch Pilot display configures the unit via the CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

) Tables, which are located in Ap-

pendix C of this manual.

Display Module Usage

TOUCH PILOT DISPLAY — The Touch Pilot display is the standard user interface for the AquaForce 30XW chillers with the ComfortLink control system. The display includes a large LCD (liquid crystal display) touch screen for display and user configuration, a Start/Stop button, and an Alarm Indicator LED (light-emitting diode). See Fig. 1.

The Touch Pilot display can be used to access various Carrier Comfort Network circumstances, contact your Carrier representative.

Operation of the Touch Pilot display is driven from the displays on the touch screen. The Touch Pilot display uses the following screen “buttons” to allow the user to operate the display and navigate within and between screens.

“BACK” returns to the next higher screen in the hierarchy.

devices. For operation under these

“HOME” displays the Default Group Display screen

for Touch Pilot display. The Default Screen is a userconfigured display of up to 9 points on each of 8 screens. This allows for quick access to various, frequently viewed points, without navigating through the Main Menu structure. This button is available at all menu levels and returns the user to the first Default Group Display screen.

“MAIN MENU” displays the Main Menu screen. This

allows access for viewing and configuration, where possible, of all points supported by the controller. This includes points such as set point and operational configuration. This button is available at all menu levels and returns the user to the Main Menu screen.

“PREVIOUS” moves the user to the next earlier

screen in a group of sequential screens of the same type.

“NEXT” advances the user to the next screen in a

group of sequential screens of the same type.

“OK” agrees with, or says “yes” to a prompt and per-

forms the appropriate processing.

“NO” rejects, or says “no” to a prompt and performs

the appropriate processing.

“CANCEL” terminates an ongoing action and returns

to the current screen without any other processing.

“CLEAR DATA” clears the data value in a data entry

dialog box. This button is used to clear incorrect data.

“RESET DATA” zeros the data value in a data entry

dialog box.

“ADD” adds the active point to a Group Display

screen.

“REMOVE” deletes a point from a Group Display

screen.

“INCREASE” modifies the value of a field within its

defined limits or “SCROLL UP” and shifts the screen view up by one item.

“DECREASE” modifies the value of a field within its

defined limits or “SCROLL DOWN” and shifts the screen view down by one item.

“PAGE DOWN” will replace the items currently on

the screen with the next group of items if the current table or list has more data than will fit on the screen.

“PAGE UP” will replace the items currently on the

screen with the previous group of items if the current table or list has more data than will fit on the screen.

“FORCE” begins the process of forcing or overriding

the value of a point.

“AUTO” begins the process of removing a force from

a point.

“MODIFY” begins the process of modifying a config-

uration value.

Page 4

“ALARM INDICATOR LIGHT” activates when a

Fig. 2 — Group Display Screen

Fig. 3 — Point Data Dialog Box

Fig. 4 — Main Menu Display

a30-4910.ep

a30-4471

a30-4472

PDS-XAXQXWPDS-XAXQXW

new alarm condition occurs. The alarm indicator light

LED, located on the right side of the display, remains activated until it is manually reset using the Reset button on the Main menu.

“START/STOP BUTTON” enables the user to start

or stop the chiller from the Touch Pilot™ display.

See Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch (SW1) on page 16 for additional information.

Several items are password protected. When required, a Password dialog box will be displayed for field input of the password. The default password is 3333. The password can be changed if desired.

Power-Up Display

— When the Touch Pilot display is powered up, it displays an initialization progress bar and attaches (initiates communication) to the Main Base Board. The Touch Pilot display then shows that controller’s default Group Display screen. See Fig. 2. This is a user-configured display screen with up to 9 points on 8 separate screens. For more information on adding or removing points from the Group Display screen, see the Group Display Screens section on page 7.

Touch any of the screen point buttons and Point Data Dialog box will be displayed with expanded information. In the example shown, the CTRL_PNT button in the bottom left corner was selected. See Fig. 2 and 3.

To exit the box, press . Main Menu Display

— The default screen for the Touch Pilot controller is the Group Display screen. To access the Main Menu, press the button. The screen shown in Fig. 4 will be displayed. Selecting a button will display the screens associated with that category. The user can also access the login screen from the Main Menu if needed.

Touch Pilot Menu Structure

— The user can navigate through the Touch Pilot display screens by selecting the buttons that appear on the screen. When a button is selected, either a submenu or a list of point names and values will be shown. Submenus will display a list of associated point names. See Fig. 5 for the Touch Pilot menu structure.

If the list of point names and values are shown, the top line of the display is the table name. The line and total line counter is displayed in the upper right corner of the display. Selecting an item will cause a Point Data dialog box to appear.

Setup Menu Screen

— The Setup Menu screen, shown in Fig. 6, is accessed by pressing the Setup button from the Main Menu. This configuration allows the user to configure the basic operation and look of the display. Table 1 summarizes the Setup Menu functions.

Page 5

User interface

Group display x 8 Main menu

Status

GENUNIT

CIRCA_AN

CIRCA_D

CIRCB_AN

CIRCB_D

CIRCC_D

CIRCC_AN

STATEGEN

RECLAIM

MODES

STRTHOUR

FANHOURS

FREECOOL

QCK_TST1

QCK_TST2

SERV_TST

Setpoint Schedule

OCC1PO1S

OCC2PO2S

Service

FACTORY

FACTORY2

SERVICE1

CP_UNABL

UPDTHOUR

UPDHRFAN

MAINTCFG

Maint

LOADFACT

FANCTRL

M_MSTSLV

DEFROSTM

LAST_POR

PR_LIMIT

BOARD_PN

SERMAINT

EXV_CTRL

CUR_PHAS

OCCDEFCFM

Config

Ctrl-ID

DISPCONF

USER

MST_SLV

CFG_TAB1

…

CFG_TAB8

BRODEFS

OCCDEFCS

HOLIDAY

ALARMDEF

Alarms

ALARHIST

ALARHIS2

ALAM_CUR

Reset Time Attach Setup

Regional

Language

Contrast

Backlight

Calibrate

Password

Display

CCN

Fig. 5 — Touch Pilot™ Display Menu Structure

a30-4829

Page 6

Table 1 — Setup Menu

Fig. 6 — Setup Menu Display

a30-4474

SETUP MENU BUTTON FUNCTION

This button specifies the time and date format and the base unit of measure. Time display can be configured as

REGIONAL

LANGUAGE

CONTRAST

BACKLIGHT This button specifies whether backlighting should be kept on at all times or turned off during inactive periods.

CALIBRATE

PASSWORDS

DISPLAY

CCN This button is used to configure the bus and element numbers and the baud rate of the control on the network.

12-hour AM/PM setting or as a 24-hour setting. The date can be formatted in one of 3 settings, MM-DD-YYYY (MonthDay-Year), DD-MM-YYYY (Day-Month-Year), or YYYY-MM-DD (Year-Month-Day). Units of measure can be either US (English) or Metric (SI).

This button selects the active language and font of the display. Available languages are English and Spanish (Espanol). If a preferred language is not available, additional software for the Main Base Board (MBB) and the Touch Pilot™ display are required. Contact your Carrier representative for instructions and software.

This button adjusts the LCD contrast. Press and hold the [MOON] button to increase/darken the contrast or the [STAR] button to decrease/lighten the current contrast. NOTE: Touching the screen anywhere for 5 seconds while powering-up will prompt the user to restore contrast and calibration settings to factory defaults.

This button is used to adjust the LCD touch screen calibration. Touch the screen in the circular targets located first in the upper left and then in the lower right corner of the screen to adjust.

This button is used to configure the limited and full logged-in access system passwords. In order to change passwords, the user must be logged in with full access to view and change the passwords. All passwords must consist of 4-digits, which can be entered using the numeric keypad. Access levels and associated privileges are as follows:

Limited Logged-in Access - Provides the user with read/write access to all available tables (except service configuration tables, where the user will not be permitted to modify point data, and Group Display tables, where the user will not be permitted to add points.) This access level also provides read/write access to all Touch Pilot display setup properties except Display, CCN, and Password.

Full Logged-in Access - Provides user with read/write access to all available tables for the attached device and all Touch Pilot display properties.

If the user does not log in, read-only access to all tables is allowed. The user will be prompted to log in when attempting to access password-required functions.

This button is used to view the description data and part number from the Ctlr-ID Table and to specify the Operating Mode. The Operating mode can be configured for Equipment mode or Network mode. For Touch Pilot displays that are standard with the unit, Operating mode should not be changed from Equipment mode. Equipment mode provides access only to the chiller’s MBB via the Local Equipment Network (LEN) Bus. For remote access, a remote Touch Pilot display can be set to Network mode. Network mode provides access to all devices on the CCN (Carrier Comfort Net-

work

) bus.

NOTE: When changing the operating mode, a power cycle is required in order for the new operating mode to take effect. The user should view and correct the following CCN data: address and baud rate, alarm acknowledger, and broadcast acknowledger designation.

Page 7

Setting the Time and Date

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

— The ComfortLink™ control has a time and date function. This can be useful for diagnostics to determine when alarms occur. The control is factory configured for the proper date and is set for the Eastern Time Zone. The date and time zone must be checked and corrected if necessary, to allow the machine to function on an internal time schedule and to display a proper time and date stamp for alarms. The time and date is displayed on the Group Display Screen.

To change the Time and Date, press the Main Menu

button. Select Time. On the display, a day and date box

with a time box will be shown. To change the day and date,

press the day and date box. A calendar will be displayed. If the

correct month is displayed, touch the correct date. If the wrong

month is displayed, use the or to change to the correct

month and select the correct date. The date will highlighted.

Press to accept the change. The previous screen will be

displayed with the corrected day and date shown. To correct

the time, use the or on the left to change the hour. Use

the or on the left to change the minutes. Continuously

touching the or will sequence the numbers. The time is

shown in a 24-hour format. To accept the changes, press the

or buttons. A “Save” dialog box is displayed with the

words, “Do you wish to save changes?” Press to accept

the changes.

Group Display Screens

— The Touch Pilot™ display supports up to eight Group Display screens. Group Display screens show status information along the top of the screens and 9 buttons that display 9 point names and point values that are chosen by the user. All Group Display screen points are user configurable. The bottom line of the screen contains navigation buttons that can be used to move between the Group Display screens.

Pressing a point button will show that point’s Point Data dialog box. See Fig. 2 and 3. This box contains buttons that remove the point from the group display and apply or remove a force (point override). When touching any button in the display screen, the button will be outlined to acknowledge input. There may be a delay in response to input, but if the button is outlined, do NOT press any other button until the previous input has been processed.

If there is a communication failure with the MBB (Main Base Board), all point buttons will be displayed in inverse video and the message Communication Failure will be displayed in the top left line of the screen.

Default Group Designation — The default group is the first of the 8 Group Display screens. This is the default screen of the display. Information on this screen as well as the other 7 screens can be user-modified to meet the needs of the site.

To Add A Point To A Group Display — From the Main Menu, press the desired menu button (Status, Setpoint, Service, Maint, or Config) and, if necessary, the sub-menu button to access the point to be added. Press the point button to show the source point’s Point Data dialog box. See Fig. 3. From the Point Data dialog box, press the ADD button. The display will show the last Group Display accessed. Use the navigation buttons to access the destination Group Display. Press an existing point button or a blank button to update the highlighted button with the source point’s name. Press to add the highlighted point to the group and return to the table display.

To Remove A Point From A Group Display — From the Point Data Dialog box, press the REMOVE button and follow the prompts. The display will return to the Group Display screen from which the point was removed, and the button corresponding to the deleted point will be blank and disabled.

NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE — The Navigator display module provides a mobile user interface to the ComfortLink control system. The display has up and down arrow keys, an key, and an key. These keys are used to navigate through the different levels of the display structure. Press the key until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is displayed. Use the up and down arrow keys to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 7. See Table 2 and Appendix B for more details about the display menu structure.

Once within a mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the

currently selected item on the display screen. Pressing the

and keys simultaneously will put the Navigator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning of all sub-modes, items, and their values can be displayed. Pressing the and keys when the display says ‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items in Run StatusVIEW). In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be made to password protected items. Press the key to exit out of the expanded text mode.

When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the display. Press the key at a changeable item and the value will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value, and confirm the value by pressing the

key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to change the value or state and press the key to accept it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are password protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed when required, with 1111 also being displayed. The default password is 0111. Use the arrow keys to change each number and press to accept the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password. The password can only be changed through CCN operator interface software such as ComfortWORKS

Power-Up Display

, ComfortVIEW™ and Service Tool.

— When the Navigator display is powered

up it will display:

ComfortLink

Navigator

Carrier

Page 8

This indicates an initialization period while the Navigator™

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

Run Status

Service Test

Temperatures

Pressures

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configuration

Time Clock

Operating Modes

Alarms

ENTER

ESC

MODE

Alarm Status

Comfort

Link

Fig. 7 — Navigator Display Module

a30-3924

display initiates communication with the Main Base Board. Once communication is established, the default rotating display will be shown. If communication is not established, the Navigator module will display:

Communication

Failure

If the Navigator module is connected to a Main Base Board without software loaded, the display will remain at the powered-up initialization display.

Setting the Time and Date

— The ComfortLink control has a time and date function. This can be useful for diagnostics to determine when alarms occur. The control is factory configured for the proper date and for use in the Eastern Time Zone. The control must be checked and corrected if necessary. The correct time is important if the machine is to function on an internal time schedule and display a proper time and date stamp for alarms. The time and date will be displayed on the default rotating display of the Navigator module. The time and date can also be checked and changed under the Time Clock mode as described below.

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

HH.MM Time of Day Time Clock TIME XX.XX

To change the time, press the arrow key to move to the correct hour and press . The minutes can be changed in a similar manner.

To check or change the date, the following items must be checked and changed if necessary.

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE MNTH Month of Year Time Clock DATE WW DOM Day of Month Time Clock DATE XX DAY Day of Week Time Clock DATE YY YEAR Year of Century Time Clock DATE ZZ

NOTE: WW is the current month of the controller, (01=January,

02=February, etc.). XX is the current day of the month YY is the day of the week, (01=Monday, 02-Tuesday, etc.) ZZ is the year of the century, (06=2006, 07=2007)

Changing the Unit of Measure — The Navigator display has two options for unit of measure on the display, English or SI (metric). The factory default for the units of measure is English. To change the unit of measure, the following item must be changed.

Adjusting the Contrast

— The contrast of the display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast, enter the LED Test mode of the device.

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

TEST Test Display LEDs Configuration DISP

Pressing will access the TEST point. Pressing

again will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Pressing and simultaneously allows the user to adjust the display contrast. The display will read:

Adjust Contrast

- - - -+ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Use the up or down arrows to adjust the contrast. The

screen’s contrast will change with the adjustment. Press

to accept the change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN (Local Equipment Network) bus.

Adjusting the Backlight Brightness

— The backlight of the display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory default is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the Navigator module, enter the LED Test mode of the device.

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE TEST Test Display LED’s Configuration Mode DISP

Pressing will access the TEST point. Pressing

again will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view screen. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. The display will read:

Adjust Brightness

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - +

Use the up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press to accept the change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

METR Metric Display Configuration DISP

Changing the Display Language

— The Navigator display

OFF – English ON – SI (Metric)

has five language options to select from, English, Espanol, Francais, Portugues, and Translated. The “Translated” option is not supported at this time. The factory default language is English. To change the display language, the following item must be changed.

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

LANG Language Selection Configuration DISP

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration

English Espanol Francais Portugues Translated

DISP LANG) variable is changed, all appropriate display expansions will immediately change to the new language. The four letter/digit code will not change. No power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring languages.

Page 9

RUN

221

195

CH1 CH2 CH3

CH4

CH11 CH12

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

CH13

CH14

CH 15A

ANALOG

INPUTS

J2C

J2B

24 VAC

J1A

+ G –

DISCRETE

INPUTS

J5A

15a

C16

J2A

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5

CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26

CH17

CH18

J5B

J5C

THERMISERS PRESSURES

CH5

CH6 CH7 CH8

CH9

J7A J7B

J7C

J7D

RELAY

OUTPUTS

MOV1

C41

C42 C43

C32

C33

C34

C35

12/11

J10

LEN

+ G -

STATUS

J9A

D15

CCN

CH10

+ G –

SIO

(LEN)

J9C

J9B

+ G –

LEN

CCN J13 J9D

+C+CCH

16a+CCH16b

Fig. 8 — Main Base Board

a30-4255

STATUS

Auto Display

(VIEW)

Machine

Starts/Hours

(RUN)

Compressor

Run Hours

(HOUR)

Compressor

Starts

(STRT)

Fan Run

Hours

(FAN)

Compressor

Disable

(CP.UN)

Predictive

Maintenance

(MAIN)

Software Versions

(VERS)

SERVICE

TEST

Manual

Test Mode

(TEST)

Quick

Test Mode

(QUIC)

Table 2 — ComfortLink™ Navigator™ Display Menu Structure

MODE

TEMPERATURES PRESSURES

Unit

Temperatures

(UNIT)

Circuit A

Temperatures

(CIR.A)

Circuit B

Temperatures

(CIR.B)

Circuit C

Temperatures

(CIR.C)

Circuit A

Pressures

(PRC.A) Circuit B

Pressures

(PRC.B) Circuit C

Pressures

(PRC.C)

SET

POINTS

Cooling

Setpoints

(COOL) Heating

Setpoints

(HEAT)

Misc.

Setpoints

(MISC)

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION

General

Inputs

(GEN.I)

Circuit A

Outputs (CIR.A)

Circuit B

Outputs (CIR.B)

Circuit C

Outputs (CIR.C)

General Outputs

(GEN.O)

Display

Configuration

(DISP)

Unit

Configuration

(UNIT)

Service

Configurations

(SERV) Options

Configuration

(OPTN)

Reset,

Demand Limit,

Master/Slave

(RSET)

TIME

CLOCK

Time of Day

(TIME)

Day, Date

(DATE)

Schedule 1

(SCH1)

Schedule 2

(SCH2)

Holidays

(HOLI)

Service

Maintenance

Configuration

(MCFG)

OPERATING

MODES

Operating

Control Type

(SLCT)

Operating

Modes

(MODE)

ALARMS

Reset Current

Alarms

(R.ALM)

Current Alarms

(ALRM)

Alarm

History

(H.ALM)

CONTROLS

General —

the ComfortLink™ electronic control system that controls and monitors all operations of the chiller. The control system is composed of several components as listed in the following sections. All machines have a Main Base Board (MBB), Touch Pilot™ module or Navigator™ device, electronic expansion valve board (EXV), auxiliary board, Compressor Protection board, Emergency On/Off switch, and an Enable-Off-Remote Contact switch.

The 30XW water-cooled liquid chillers contain

Main Base Board (MBB) — The MBB is the core of

the ComfortLink control system. It contains the major portion

machine. See Fig. 8. The MBB continuously monitors input/ output channel information received from its inputs and from all other modules. The MBB receives inputs from status and feedback switches, pressure transducers and thermistors. The MBB also controls several outputs. Some inputs and outputs that control the chiller are located on other boards, but are transmitted to or from the MBB via the internal communications bus. Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network). The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

) bus is also supported. Connections to both LEN and CCN buses are made at TB3. For a complete description of Main Base Board inputs and outputs and their channel identifications, see Table 3.

of operating software and controls the operation of the

Page 10

Table 3 — Main Base Board Inputs and Outputs

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE DISPLAY MODULE POINT NAME

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

Local Equipment Network —— —

Carrier Communication

Network

Chilled Water Flow Switch CWFS Switch Cooler Flow Switch, LOCK

Demand Limit Switch No. 1 Demand Limit SW1 Switch Limit Switch 1 Status, DLS1 MBB-J4-CH13

Condenser Flow Switch CDFS Switch Condenser Flow Switch, COND 16A MBB-J5A-CH16A

Circuit A Discharge

Pressure Transducer

Circuit B Discharge

Pressure Transducer

Dual Chiller

LWT Thermistor

Dual Set Point Input Dual Set Point Switch Remote Setpoint Switch, DUAL MBB-J4-CH12

Heat/Cool Switch HC_SW Switch Heat/Cool Select Contact, HC_SW

Entering Water Thermistor EWT 5k Thermistor Cooler Entering Fluid, EWT MBB-J6-CH2

Leaving Water Thermistor LWT 5k Thermistor Cooler Leaving Fluid, LW T MBB-J6-CH1

Condenser Entering Water

Thermistor

Condenser Leaving Water

Thermistor

External Chilled

Water Pump Interlock

Circuit A Suction

Pressure Transducer

Circuit B Suction

Pressure Transducer

Unit Status Remote Contact-Off-Enable Switch On/Off Remote Switch, ONOF MBB-J4-CH11

Alarm Relay ALM R Relay Alarm Relay Output, ALRM MBB-J3-CH24

Alert Relay ALT R Relay Alert Relay Output, ALRT MBB-J3-CH25 Cooler Pump Relay 1 PMP1 Contactor Cooler Pump 1, CPUMP_1 MBB-J2A-CH19 Cooler Pump Relay 2 PMP2 Contactor Cooler Pump 2, CPUMP_2 MBB-J2A-CH20

Condenser Pump Relay CPMP Contactor Condenser Pump, COND_PMP MBB-J2C-CH22

Pump #1 Interlock Pump #2 Interlock

LEGEND

I/O — Input or Output LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

—— —

DPTA Pressure Transducer Discharge Pressure, DP.A

DPTB Pressure Transducer Discharge Pressure, DP.B

DUAL 5k Thermistor CHWS Temperature, CHWS MBB-J6-CH3

CEWT 5k Thermistor Condenser Entering Fluid, CEWT MBB-J6-CH5

CLWT 5k Thermistor Condenser Leaving Fluid, CLWT MBB-J6-CH4

PMPI Switch Electrical Box Interlock, ELEC MBB-J4-CH15A

SPTA Pressure Transducer Suction Pressure, SP.A

SPTB Pressure Transducer Suction Pressure, SP.B

PMP_1 PMP_2

Switch Cooler Pump Run Status, PUMP MBB-J5C-CH18

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

MBB-J1, MBB-J1A,

MBB-J1B 11 24 vac 12 Ground

MBB-J9A, MBB-J9B,

MBB-J9C, MBBJ9D

+ RS485 Port (D+)

G RS485 Port (Gnd)

- RS485 Port (D-) MBB-J12

+ RS485 Port (D+)

G RS485 Port (Gnd)

- RS485 Port (D-)

MBB-J5B-CH17

MBB-J7A-CH6

5V +5 vdc Ref.

SSignal R Return

MBB-J7C-CH8

5V +5 vdc Ref.

SSignal R Return

MBB-J4-CH14

MBB-J7B-CH7

5V +5 vdc Ref.

SSignal R Return

MBB-J7D-CH9

5V +5 vdc Ref.

SSignal R Return

Compressor Protection Module (CPM) — There

is one CPM per compressor. See Fig. 9. The device controls the compressor contactors, oil solenoid, and loading/unloading the solenoid. The CPM also monitors the compressor motor temperature, high pressure switch, oil level switch, discharge gas temperature, oil pressure transducer, motor current, MTA (must trip amps) setting and economizer pressure transducer (sizes 175,200,350,400 only). The CPM responds to commands from the MBB (Main Base Board) and sends the MBB the results of the channels it monitors via the LEN (Local

Equipment Network). The CPM has three DIP switch input banks, Switch 1 (S1), Switch 2 (S2), and Switch 3 (S3). The CPM board DIP switch (S1) configures the board for the type of starter, the location and type of the current transformers and contactor failure instructions. See Table 4 for description of DIP switch 1 (S1) inputs. See Appendix D for DIP switch settings.

Page 11

DIP

Fig. 9 — Compressor Protection Module

a30-4215

SWITCH 2

(S2)

DIP

SWITCH 3

(S3)

SMT

CT1

CT2

CT3

102

J10B

CH04

PRESS OIL

100K

J10A

CH03

PRESS

ECO

TMP

CH02

R20

102

123 4

MOT

CH01

J11

AUX

151

102

123 45678

151

102

MTA

13CH14

151

151 151 151

151

102

151

LOADERS OLS MOTOR COOLING

151

561

24 VDC/OLL

HPS

561

620

101

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

151

100 K

101

SIO

(LEN)

SI0 STATU S

(LEN)

STAT US

SWITCH 1

– G +

3 2 1

DIP

(S1)

J12

– G +

3 2 1

Table 4 — DIP Switch 1 (S1) Inputs

DIP SWITCH POSITION FUNCTION SETTING MEANING

2, 3

4, 5, 6

8 Not Used — —

The CPM board DIP switch S2 setting determines the must trip amps (MTA) setting. See Appendix D for DIP switch settings. The MTA setting which is calculated using the settings S2 must match the MTA setting in the software or an MTA alarm will be generated.

Starter Configuration OFF Across-the-line Start

ON Wye-Delta Start

Current Transformer (CT) Position OFF (2), OFF (3) CT is located in the main line

ON (2), OFF (3) CT is located in the Delta of the motor OFF (2), ON (3) Reserved for future use ON (2), ON (3) Invalid; will cause MTA configuration alarm

Current Transformer (CT) Selection OFF (4), OFF (5), OFF (6) 100A/1V CT1

ON (4), OFF (5), OFF (6) 100A/0.503V CT2 OFF (4), ON (5), OFF (6) 100A/0.16V CT3 ON (4), ON (5), OFF (6) Invalid; will cause MTA configuration alarm OFF (4), OFF (5), ON (6) Invalid; will cause MTA configuration alarm ON (4), OFF (5), ON (6) Invalid; will cause MTA configuration alarm OFF (4), ON (5), ON (6) Invalid; will cause MTA configuration alarm ON (4), ON (5), ON (6) Invalid; will cause MTA configuration alarm

Contactor Failure Action OFF All units should be off

ON Used when Shunt Trip is available in the unit

See below for CPM board DIP switch S3 address informa-

tion. See Table 5 for CPM inputs and outputs.

CPM-A DIP Switch 3 1 2 3 4

Address: OFF OFF OFF OFF

CPM-B DIP Switch 3 1 2 3 4

Address: OFF OFF ON OFF

Page 12

Table 5 — Compressor Protection Module Inputs and Outputs*

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE DISPLAY MODULE POINT NAME

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

Local Equipment Network —— —

Circuit X High Pressure Switch HPS-X Switch Not available

Oil Level Switch Oil LS X Switch Circuit X Oil Solenoid, OLS.X

Must Trip Amps† MTA (S2) 8-Pin DIP Switch Must Trip Amps, MTA.X

Configuration Switch† S1 8-Pin DIP Switch S1 Config Switch, C.SW.X

Compressor X Motor Temperature MTR-X NTC Thermistor Motor Temperature, CTP.X

Compressor X Discharge Gas Temperature DGT X NTC Thermistor Discharge Gas Temp, DGT.X

Oil Pressure Transducer OPT X Pressure Transducer Oil Pressure, OP.X

Economizer Pressure Transducer

(sizes 175,200,350,400 only)

Compressor Current X Phase A Current Sensor CUR.A

Compressor Current X Phase B Current Sensor CUR.B

Compressor Current X Phase C Current Sensor CUR.C

Compressor X 1M Contactor C X 1M Contactor Compressor Output, CP.X

Compressor X 2M Contactor C X 2M Contactor Not available

Compressor X S Contactor C X S Contactor Not available

Oil Solenoid X Oil solenoid-X Solenoid Oil Solenoid Output, OLS.X

Load Solenoid X Loading Solenoid-X Solenoid Slide Valve 1 Output, SL1.X

Unload Solenoid X Unloading Solenoid-X Solenoid Slide Valve 2 Output, SL2.X

*“X” denotes the circuit, A or B.

†See Appendix D for MTA settings.

EPT X Pressure Transducer Economizer Pressure, ECP.X

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

CPM-X-J1 11 24 vac 12 Ground

CPM-X-JP12 1 RS485 Port (D+) 2 RS485 Port (Gnd) 3 RS485 Port (D-)

CPM-X-J12 1 RS485 Port (D+) 2 RS485 Port (Gnd) 3 RS485 Port (D-)

CPM-X-J7-CH05

CPM-X-J6-CH06

CPM-X-J9-CH01

CPM-X-J9-CH02

CPM-X-J10B-CH04

5V + 5 vdc ref

S Signal

RReturn

CPM-X-J10A

5V + 5 vdc ref

S Signal

RReturn

CPM-X-J8-CH01

CPM-X-J8-CH02

CPM-X-J8-CH3

CPM-X-J1-CH07 1 2

CPM-X-J2-CH8 1 2

CPM-X-J2-CH9 1 2

CPM-X-J2-CH12 1 2

CPM-X-J2-CH13 1

CPM-X-J2-CH14 1 2

Page 13

100

257-01

712

100K

100

J2A EXVA

J2B EXVB

24VAC

STATUS

MOV1

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

432 1

THA THB

C15

C16

Q2 Q1

12/11

C17

Q45

Q42Q37

Q35

Q25

Q27

Q30

Q20

Q22

Q17

Q15

Q12

Q10

C10

C11

C37C39

D15

C25

C49

R3 L3

TEMP

D29

D9 D8

SI0 (LEN)

COMM J4

DIP SWITCH

Fig. 10 — EXV Board

a30-4216

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board —

The 30XW150-325 units have one EXV board. The 30XW350,400 units have one EXV board per circuit. See Fig. 10. The board is responsible for monitoring the suction gas temperature and economizer gas temperature thermistors. The board also signals the main EXV and economizer EXV (ECEXV) motors to open or close. The electronic expansion valve board responds to commands from the MBB and sends the MBB the results of the channels it monitors via the LEN (Local Equipment Network). See below for DIP switch information. See Tables 6 and 7 for EXV inputs and outputs.

EXV BOARD 1

(150-400)

123456 7 8

DIP SWITCH

Address: ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON

EXV BOARD 2

(350,400)

DIP SWITCH

1 23456 7 8

Address: OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON

Page 14

Table 6 — EXV1 Board Inputs and Outputs (30XW150-325)

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE DISPLAY MODULE POINT NAME

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

Local Equipment Network —— —

Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor SGTA 5k Thermistor Compressor Suction Temp, SGT.A

Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor SGTB 5k Thermistor Compressor Suction Temp, SGT.B

Circuit A EXV EXV-A Stepper Motor EXV Position, EXV.A

Circuit B EXV

(size 325 only)

EXV-B Stepper Motor EXV Position, EXV.B

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

EXVA-J1 11 24 vac 12 Ground

EXVA-J4

1 RS485 Port (D+) 2 RS485 Port (Gnd) 3 RS485 Port (D–)

EXVA-J3

EXVA-J2A 1 2 3 4

EXVA-J2B 1 2 3 4

Table 7 — EXV1,2 Board Inputs and Outputs* (30XW350,400)

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

Local Equipment Network ——

Circuit X Suction Gas Thermistor SGT X 5k Thermistor Compressor Suction Temp, SGT.X

Circuit X Economizer Gas Thermistor ECT X 5k Thermistor Economizer Gas Temp, ECT.X

Circuit X EXV EXV-X Stepper Motor EXV Position, EXV.X

Circuit X Economizer EXV ECEXV-X Stepper Motor Cir X Economizer EXV Pos, ECO.X

*“X” denotes the circuit: 1 = Circuit A; 2 = Circuit B.

DISPLAY MODULE POINT NAME

—

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

EXVX-J1 11 24 vac 12 Ground

EXVX-J4

1 RS485 Port (D+) 2 RS485 Port (Gnd) 3 RS485 Port (D–)

EXVX-J3 TH

EXVX-J2A 1 2 3 4

Page 15

MLV/Condenser Board — One auxiliary board is op-

100K

CH1

CH2 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8

STAT US SIO (LEN)

LOCATION OF SERIAL NUMBER

24 VAC

CH13 CH14

CH9

CH10

CH11

CH12

JP2

C61

CH13

D12

JP1

U21

Q10

Q11

U10

Q12

Q60

3 2 1

– G +

3 2 1

– G +

DIP SWITCH

Fig. 11 — Auxiliary Board with Optional Minimum Load Control or Head Pressure Control

a30-4046

tionally installed in each unit. See Fig. 11. The auxiliary board contains an analog output for head pressure control and discrete outputs for minimum load control. The auxiliary board responds to commands from the MBB and sends the MBB the results of the channels it monitors via the Local Equipment

Network (LEN). See below for auxiliary board A, B and C DIP switch addresses. See Table 8 for inputs and outputs.

AUX BOARD DIP SWITCH

Address: OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

123 45678

Table 8 — Auxiliary Board Outputs

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE DISPLAY MODULE POINT NAME

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

Local Equipment Network —— —

Condenser Head Pressure Control

Speed Signal

Minimum Load Valve A MLV-A Solenoid Minimum Load Valve Circuit A, MLV.A AUX-J2-CH3 Minimum Load Valve B MLV-B Solenoid Minimum Load Valve Circuit B, MLV.B AUX-J2-CH4

HD_A 0-10 VDC Head Press Actuator Pos, SPD.A

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

AUX-J 1 11 24 vac 12 Ground

AUX-J 9

+ RS485 Port (D+) G RS485 Port (Gnd)

-RS485 Port (D-) + RS485 Port (D+) G RS485 Port (Gnd)

-RS485 Port (D-)

AUX-C H9

+ Signal

- Ground

Page 16

Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch (SW1) —

Fig. 12 — Energy Management Module

221

100K

CH 17

CH 16

CH 18

CH 19

CH 20

CH 22

CH 21

CH 23

24 VAC

12 11

11b

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

SIO LEN

+ G -

SIO LEN

J7B

J7A

J4J3J2B

J2A

J9A

J9B

a30-4911

This switch is installed in all units and provides the owner and service person with a local means of enabling or disabling the machine. It is a 3-position switch and it is used to control the chiller. When switched to the Enable position, the chiller will be under its own control. When switched to the Off position, the chiller will shut down. When switched to the Remote Contact position, a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the chiller. The contacts must be capable of handling a 24-vac, 50-mA load. In the Enable and Remote Contact (dry contacts closed) positions, the chiller is allowed to operate and respond to the scheduling configuration, CCN configuration, and set point data.

For units with a Touch Pilot™ display, the position of the Enable/Off/Remote contact switch is ignored except when the Remote Mode operating type is selected. Refer to the Machine Control Methods section on page 20 for more details.

Emergency On/Off Switch (SW2) — This switch is

installed in all units. The Emergency On/Off switch should only be used when it is required to shut the chiller off immediately. Power to all modules is interrupted when this switch is off and all outputs from these modules will be turned off.

Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM

is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-installed accessory. See Fig. 12. The EMM receives 4 to 20 mA inputs for the temperature reset, cooling set point and demand limit functions. The EMM also receives the switch inputs for the field-installed second stage 2-step demand limit and ice done functions. The EMM communicates the status of all inputs with the MBB, and the MBB adjusts the control point, capacity limit, and other functions according to the inputs received. See Table 9.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufacturer’s control systems due to possible power supply differences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification, which could lead to equipment damage. The two different power supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if incorporating a full wave bridge rectifier signal generating device is used.

Page 17

Table 9 — Energy Management Module (EMM) Inputs and Outputs

Fig. 13 — Touch Pilot™ Display Wiring

INPUT/OUTPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE DISPLAY MODULE POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT 4-20 mA Demand Limit 4-20 mA Demand Limit 4-20 mA* Limit 4-20 mA Signal, DMD EMM-J7B-CH6 4-20 mA Temperature

Reset/Cooling Setpoint Demand Limit SW2 Demand Limit Step 2 Switch Input Switch Limit Setpoint 2, DLS2 EMM-J4-CH9 Ice Done Ice Done Switch Switch Input Ice Done Storage Switch, ICE.D EMM-J4-CH11A Occupancy Override Occupied Schedule Override Switch Input Occupied Override Switch, OCCS EMM-J4-CH8 Remote Lockout Switch Chiller Lockout Switch Input Remote Interlock Switch, RLOC EMM-J4-CH10 SPT Space Temperature Thermistor 10k Thermistor Optional Space Temp, SPT EMM-J6-CH2 % Total Capacity Percent Total Capacity Output 0-10 vdc Chiller Capacity Signal, CATO EMM-J8-CH7 RUN R Run Relay Relay Running Status, RUN EMM-J3-CH25 SHD R Shutdown Relay Relay Shutdown Indicator State, SHUT EMM-J3-CH24 CA_S Run Status for Circuit A Relay Compressor A Run Status, Q_RUN_A EMM-J2A-CH17 CB_S Run Status for Circuit B Relay Compressor B Run Status, Q_RUN_B EMM-J2A-CH18

* A field-supplied 1/2 watt 250 ohm resistor is required across terminals TB6-1,2 (CH6) and/or TB6-3, 4 (CH5).

Local Equipment Network — Information is trans-

mitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network). External connection to the LEN bus is made at TB3.

Board Addresses — All boards (except the Main Base

Board and Energy Management Module Board) have 8-position DIP switches.

Touch Pilot™ Display — The Touch Pilot display port

connections are shown in Table 10. Wiring is shown in Fig. 13.

Control Module Communication

RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs (lightemitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status LEDs will blink in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. If the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify that correct power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that the Main Base Board (MBB) is supplied with the current software. If necessary, reload current software. If the problem still persists, replace the MBB. A red LED that is lit continuously or blinking at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the board should be replaced.

GREEN LED — All boards have a green LEN (SIO) LED which should be blinking whenever power is on. If the LEDs are not blinking as described check LEN connections for

4-20 mA Temperature Reset/ Cooling Set point

4-20 mA*

Reset/Setpnt 4-20 mA Signal, RSET

EMM-J7A-CH5

potential communication errors at the board connectors. See input/output Tables 3-10 for LEN connector designations. A 3-wire bus accomplishes communication between modules. These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module. The J9A connector on the MBB provides communication directly to the Navigator™ display module.

YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN) LED will blink during times

of network communication.

Table 10 — Touch Pilot™ Display Port

Connections

CONNECTOR PIN FUNCTION

124VAC +

J1 (Power)

J2 (COM1)

J3 (RJ11)

224VAC 3 Earth Ground 1 RS485 Port (D+) 2 RS485 Port (GND) 3 RS485 Port (D-) 124VAC (+) 2 RS485 Port (D+) 3 RS485 Port (GND) 4 Unused (no connect) 5 RS485 Port (D-) 624VAC(-)

Page 18

Carrier Comfort Network® (CCN) Interface —

Fig. 14 — ComfortLink™ CCN Communication Wiring

(+) (COM) (-) SHIELD

CCN

RED

WHT

BLK

CCNLEN

(+) (COM) (-) SHIELD

CCN

RED

WHT

BLK

CCNLEN

TO NEXT DEVICE

(+) (COM) (-) SHIELD

CCN

RED

WHT

BLK

CCN

LEN

SHIELD

LEGEND

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network

LEN — Local Equipment Network

a30-4706

All 30XW units can be connected to a CCN system, if desired. The communication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with drain wire and is field supplied and installed. The system elements are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain arrangement. The positive pin of each system element communication connector must be wired to the positive pins of the system elements on either side of it. The negative and signal ground pins of each system element must also be wired in the same manner. Wiring connections for CCN should be made at TB3. Consult the CCN Contractor’s Manual for further information. See Fig. 14.

NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (American Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of –20 C to 60 C is required. See Table 11 for recommended wire manufacturers and part numbers.

Table 11 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring

MANUFACTURER

Alpha 1895 — American A21451 A48301 Belden 8205 884421 Columbia D6451 — Manhattan M13402 M64430 Quabik 6130 —

Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring

It is important when connecting to a CCN communication bus that a color-coding scheme be used for the entire network to simplify the installation. It is recommended that red be used for the signal positive, black for the signal negative, and white for the signal ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different colored wires.

At each system element, the shields of its communication bus cables must be tied together. If the communication bus is entirely within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be connected to a ground at one point only. If the communication bus cable exits from one building and enters another, the shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning suppressor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building (one point per building only). To connect the unit to the network:

PART NU M B E R

1. Turn off power to the control box.

2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white (ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropriate colors for different colored cables.)

3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on TB3 of the plug, the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the (–) terminal.

4. The RJ14 CCN connector on TB3 can also be used, but is only intended for temporary connection (for example, a laptop computer running Service Tool).

IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent some routines from running and may prevent the unit from starting. If abnormal conditions occur, disconnect the CCN bus. If conditions return to normal, check the CCN connector and cable. Run new cable if necessary. A short in one section of the bus can cause problems with all system elements on the bus.

Remote Alarm and Alert Relays — The 30XW

chiller can be equipped with a remote alert and remote alarm annunciator contacts. Both relays connected to these contacts must be rated for a maximum power draw of 10 va sealed, 25 va inrush at 24 volts. The alarm relay, indicating that the complete unit has been shut down, can be connected to TB5-12 and TB5-13. Refer to unit wiring diagrams. For an alert relay, indicating that at least 1 circuit is off due to the alert, a fieldsupplied and installed relay must be connected between MBBJ3-CH25-3 and TB5-13. The action of the alarm and alert relays can be reversed from normally open to normally closed by using the Reverse Alarms Relay configuration (Reverse Alarms Relay, RV.AL).

CONFIGURATION

Touch Pilot™ Operation Configuration Tables —

configuration information entered in the following configuration tables. These tables are accessible by using Network Service Tool or ComfortVIEW™ software. The tables are the CtrlID (Controller Identification) configuration table and the USERCONF (User Configuration) table. See Tables 12 and 13.

NOTE: Always perform an Upload to obtain the latest configuration before making configuration table changes.

The Touch Pilot display operation is controlled by

Page 19

Table 12 — Touch Pilot Controller Identification Configuration Table

CONTROLLER ID DATA BLOCK NO. VALUE AND RANGE QUALIFIERS

Device Name 1

Local address 2 115 Default Bus number 2 0 Default

Device (driver) type 2

Primary baud rate 3 38400 Default Secondary baud rate 3 38400 Fixed

Device description 4

Device location 4

Software part number 4 CESR-131363-01 Fixed Model number 4 (Blank) Fixed Serial number 4 (Blank) Fixed Reference number 4 Version 1.0 Fixed

Broadcast address processing list (primary) 5

Broadcast address processing list (secondary) 5 none Not applicable

CHILLDSP 8 character Name field

0 = Non-bridge 3 = Broadcast Acknowledger

Global Chiller Display 24 character text field

(Blank) 24 character text field

241-251, 254, 255 enabled 241-255 enabled/disabled

Default Optional

Defaults Optional

Table 13 — Touch Pilot™ User Configuration (USERCONF) Table

DESCRIPTION LIMITS UNITS NAME DEFAULT

Backlight always on?

Full access password

Limited access password

Active language

Time format

Date format

Units base

Contrast control

Network mode

Network settings

Alarm acknowledger

Broadcast acknowledger

Equipment CCN address

Bus number

Element number

Control variables

Equipment status (Not Used)

Equipment start/stop (Not Used)

Alarm status (Not Used)

Alarm reset (Not Used)

No Ye s

0 9999

0 1

0 2

US Metric

Manual Auto

0 1

No Ye s

0 239

1 239

Name char 8

BACKLITE No

PSWDFULL 3333

PSWDLMTD 2222

ACTLANG 0

TIMEFMT 0

DATEFMT 0

UNITBASE US

CONTRAST Auto

NETWORK 0

ALARMACK No

BROADACK No

EQUIPBUS 0

EQUIPELE 1

EQSTATUS NOT USED

STARSTOP NOT USED

ALSTATUS NOT USED

ALRESET NOT USED

BACKLIGHT ALWAYS ON? — This configuration is used to keep the backlight on continuously or to turn it off after 60 seconds with no activity.

Allowable Entries: No/Yes (No=0 or Yes=1) Default Value: No

FULL ACCESS PASSWORD — This configuration is used to specify the full access password. Refer to Table 1, Setup Menu, for additional information on passwords.

Allowable Entries: 0 through 9999 Default Value: 3333

Page 20

LIMITED ACCESS PANEL — This configuration is used to

Fig. 15 — Equipment Start Screen

specify the limited access password. Allowable Entries: 0 through 9999 Default Value: 2222 ACTIVE LANGUAGE — This configuration is used to spec-

ify the display’s active language. All translatable text will be displayed in this language.

Allowable Entries: 0 (English), 1 (alternate, installed by user) Default Value: 0 TIME FORMAT — This configuration is used to specify the

format for display of time. Allowable Entries: 0 = H:MM AM/PM without leading zero

1 = HH:MM with leading zero when

necessary Default Value: 0 DATE FORMAT — This configuration is used to specify the

format for display of date. Allowable Entries: 0 = MM-DD-YYYY with leading zero

when necessary

1 = DD-MM-YYYY with leading zero

when necessary

2 = YYYY-MM-DD Default Value: 0 UNITS BASE — This configuration is used to specify the for-

mat of the units of measure. Allowable Entries: U.S.

Metric Default Value: U.S. CONTRAST CONTROL — This configuration is used to en-

able or disable the display’s auto contrast adjustment feature. When enabled, the display’s contrast will be automatically adjusted as required, based on temperature.

Allowable Entries: Manual

(Auto Contrast Adjustment Disabled)

Auto

(Auto Contrast Adjustment Enabled) Default Value: Auto NETWORK MODE — This configuration is used to set the

display’s operating mode. For additional information on operating mode, refer to Display in the Table Setup Menu. This decision will be ignored and the mode will default to Equipment when the display is connected to a device (the LEN Bus).

NOTE: A power cycle is required for this decision to take effect.

Allowable Entries: Disable = Equipment Mode

Enable = Network Mode Default Value: Disable ALARM ACKNOWLEDGER — This configuration is used

to specify whether the Touch Pilot™ display will act as the alarm acknowledger for the CCN. There can be only one alarm acknowledger per CCN. Therefore, if another CCN device such as ComfortVIEW™ software, the Autodial Gateway or TeLINK is already set as the alarm acknowledger for the CCN network then this decision should be set to No.

NOTE: The display must be in Network mode and connected to the primary CCN bus and this decision set to Ye s for alarm acknowledgement to be enabled.

Allowable Entries: No

Ye s Default Value: No

BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER — This configuration is used to indicate whether the Touch Pilot display will act as the broadcast acknowledger for its CCN bus. There can be only one broadcast acknowledger per CCN bus.

NOTE: The display must be in Network mode and this decision set to Ye s for broadcast acknowledgement to be enabled.

Allowable Entries: No

Ye s Default Value: 0 EQUIPMENT CCN ADDRESS — When in equipment

mode (USERCONF Table’s Network Mode decision is set to Disable), the Bus Number and Element Number decisions are used to specify the CCN address of the piece of equipment to communicate with. An Attach or power cycle must be performed for changes to take effect. These decisions will be ignored when the display is connected to the LEN bus or in Network mode. In Network mode, specify the bus and element number of the equipment communicate with using the display’s Attach function.

NOTE: In Network mode, these configurations will be overwritten with the default device address if it is changed through the Attach process.

BUS NUMBER — This configuration is used to specify the Equipment Controller bus number.

Allowable Entries: 0 through 239 Default Value: 0 ELEMENT NUMBER — This configuration is used to speci-

fy the Equipment Controller element number. Allowable Entries: 1 through 239 Default Value: 1

Machine Control Methods — Three variables con-

trol how the machine operates. These variables control the On-Off function, set point operation, and Heat-Cool operation.

Machine On/Off Control — Machine On/Off control

depends on which interface display is used. The control is different for Touch Pilot™ or Navigator™ displays. Select the correct configuration procedure below based on which interface is being used.

TOUCH PILOT MACHINE CONTROL — Machine On/Off control is determined locally by pushing the Start/Stop button on the Touch Pilot display. Pressing this button will cause the Equipment Start screen to be displayed. See Fig. 15.

Page 21

Table 14 summarizes the unit control type and stop or go

status with regard to the following parameters:

• Operating type: this is selected by using the start/stop button on the front of the user interface.

• Remote start/stop contacts: these contacts are used when the unit is in remote operating type (Remote mode).

• CHIL_S_S: this network command variable relates to the chiller start/stop when the unit is in CCN control (CCN mode). When this variable forced to Disable, then the unit is stopped. When this variable is forced to Enable, then the unit runs in accordance with schedule 1.

• Start/Stop schedule: occupied or unoccupied status of the unit as determined by the chiller start/stop program (Schedule 1).

• Master control type: This parameter is used when the unit is the master unit in a two chiller lead/lag arrangement. The master control type determines whether the unit is to be controlled locally, remotely or through CCN (this parameter is a Service configuration).

• CCN emergency shutdown: if this CCN command is activated, it shuts the unit down whatever the active operating type.

• General alarm: the unit is totally stopped due to failure.

Local Mode

— To start the machine in local mode, press the Start/Stop button on the Touch Pilot display. The Equipment Start screen will be displayed. Select Local On. The control will ignore the position of Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch and all CCN network force commands, except an Emergency Stop Command. The Run Status variable, indicating the cur- rent status of the machine, will change to RUNNING, DELAY or READY. The Chiller Occupied? variable will change to YES. The Control Type variable indicates the type of control. For this configuration, Control Type will be Local. The Oper- ating Type variable will change to L-On (Local On).

Local Schedule

— To start the machine with a local schedule, press the Start/Stop button on the Touch Pilot display. The Equipment Start screen will be displayed. Select Local Schedule. The unit will start and stop according to the schedule defined in the Time Schedule menu. Two Internal Time Schedules are available and must be field programmed. Time Schedule 1 is used for single set point On-Off control. Time

Table 14 — Touch Pilot™ Start/Stop Control

Schedule 2 is used for Dual Set Point/Occupied-Unoccupied set point control. The control will ignore the position of Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch and all CCN network force commands, except the Emergency Stop Command.

The Run Status variable will indicate the current status of the machine — OFF, RUNNING, DELAY, or READY. The Chiller Occupied? variable will indicate the occupied state of the machine according to Time Schedule 1 and will be either YES (occupied) or NO (unoccupied). The Control Type vari- able will indicate the type of control. For this configuration, Control Type will be Local. The Operating Type variable will change to L-Sched (Local Schedule).

The schedules consist of 8 user-configurable occupied time periods. The control supports time schedules for local control, remote control, and ice building. These time periods can be flagged to be in effect or not in effect on each day of the week. The day begins at 00.00 and ends at 24.00. The machine will be in unoccupied mode unless a scheduled time period is in effect. If an occupied period extends past midnight, the occupied period will automatically end at 24:00 hours (midnight) and the new occupied period must be programmed to begin at 00:00 hours.

In the following example, the occupied period starts at 6:00 AM, Monday through Friday and 10:00 AM on Saturday and Sunday. The occupied time ends at 6:30 PM on Monday through Friday and 2:00 PM on Saturday and Sunday. See Fig. 16.

NOTE: This schedule was designed to illustrate the programming of the schedule function and is not intended as a recommended schedule for chiller operation.

If the chiller is to be controlled to a single set point, use Schedule 1 (OCCPC01S). This will start and stop the machine. During the unoccupied times, the chiller will be off. If the chiller is to be controlled to 2 set points, occupied and unoccupied, use Schedule 2 (OCCPC02S). This will cause the chiller to control to an occupied set point and an unoccupied set point. The machine will be able to provide cooling at any time.

To configure this option on the Touch Pilot™ display see Table 15.

ACTIVE OPERATING TYPE PARAMETER STATUS

LocalOnLocalOnLocal

-- - - - - - - - - Active - - Off

-- - - - - - - - - - Yes - Off

Active - - - - - - - - - - - Local Off

- - Active - - - - - - Unoccupied - - Local Off

- - - Active - - - Off - - - - Remote Off

- - - Active - - - - - Unoccupied - - Remote Off

- - - - Active - Off - - - - - CCN Off

- - - - Active - - - - - - - CCN Off

- - - - - Active - - Local Unoccupied - - Local Off

- - - - - Active - Off Remote - - - Remote Off

- - - - - Active - - Remote Unoccupied - - Remote Off

- - - - - Active Off - CCN - - - CCN Off

- - - - - Active - - CCN Unoccupied - - CCN Off

- Active - - - - - - - - Disabled No Local On

- - Active - - - - - - Occupied Disabled No Local On

- - - Active - - - On Cool - Occupied Disabled No Remote On

- - - - Active - On - - Occupied Disabled No CCN On

- - - - - Active - - Local Occupied Disabled No Local On

- - - - - Active - On Cool Remote Occupied Disabled No Remote On

- - - - - Active On - CCN Occupied Disabled No CCN On

Schedule

Remote

Mode

CCN

Mode

Master

Mode

CHIL_S_S

Varia ble

Remote

Start/Stop

Contact

Master Unit

Control Type

Start/Stop

Schedule

Mode

CCN

Emergency

Shutdown

General

Alarm

CONTROL

TYPE

UNIT

STATUS

Page 22

on a one-time basis. To configure this option for the Touch

Fig. 16 — Chiller Schedule Screen

Pilot display:

Table 15 — Configuring the Schedule with

Touch Pilot Display

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE Period 1 DOW (MTWTFSSH) Occupied from 3 00:00 Occupied to 4 03:00 Period 2 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 5 11000000 Occupied from 6 07:00 Occupied to 7 18:00 Period 3 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 8 00100000 Occupied from 9 07:00 Occupied to 10 21:30 Period 4 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 11 00011000 Occupied from 12 07:00 Occupied to 13 17:00 Period 5 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 14 00000100 Occupied from 15 07:00 Occupied to 16 12:00

Holiday Schedule

— For the Touch Pilot display, the control

Config\

OCCDEFCS\

OCC1P01S

or OCC1P02S

2 10000000

allows up to 16 holiday periods. All holidays are entered with numerical values. To configure, first change the month (Holi- day Start Month), then the day (Holiday Start Day), then the duration (Holiday Duration) of the holiday period in days. If a holiday in included in one of the Occupied Time Periods of the schedule, the machine will follow that operating condition for the holiday. In the following examples, the holidays July 4 and December 25-26 are programmed for Holiday 1 and Holiday 2, respectively. To configure these holidays with the Touch Pilot display, see Table 16. To configure Holidays with the Navigator display, check the H (holiday) schedule on the Schedule screen and program in the desired occupied times. See Fig. 16.

Table 16 — Programming Holiday Schedules with

Touch Pilot Display

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE Holiday Start Month Start Day 24 Duration (days) 31 Holiday Start Month Start Day 225 Duration (days) 32

Timed Override

Config\HOLIDAY\HOLDY_01

Config\HOLIDAY\HOLDY_02

— With the Touch Pilot display only, each

112

time schedule can be overridden to keep the chiller in an Occupied mode (Timed Override Hours) for 1, 2, 3 or 4 hours

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Timed Override Hours

Config\OCCDEFCS\

OCC1P01S or OCC1P02S

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

Range: 0 to 4

Default: 0

If configured for a timed override, the override can be can-

celled by changing the Timed Override Hours to 0. CCN Global Time Schedule

— A CCN global schedule can be used if desired. The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65 to 99 for operation under a CCN global schedule. The 30XW chillers can be configured to follow a CCN Global Time Schedule broadcast by another system element. The ComfortVIEW™ Network Manager’s Configure and Modify commands or the Service Tool’s Modify/Names function must be used to change the number of the Occupancy Equipment Part Table Name (OCC1P01E) to the Global Schedule Number. The Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99 (OCC1P65E to OCC1P99E).

The Occupancy Supervisory Part table name (OCC1P01S) number must be changed to configure the unit to broadcast a Global Time Schedule. The Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99 (OCC1P65S to OCC1P99S). When OCC1PxxS is set to a value greater than 64, an occupancy flag is broadcast over the CCN every time it transitions from occupied to unoccupied or vice-versa. By configuring their appropriate Time Schedule decisions to the same number, other devices on the network can follow this same schedule. The Enable/Off/Remote Contact must be in the Enable position or the Remote Contact position with the contacts closed for the unit to operate. The Unit Run Status (STAT) will indicate the current status of the machine (OFF, RUNNING, STOPPING or DELAY), depending on the schedule. The unit Occupied status (OCC) will indicate the current occupied schedule according to the schedule, either NO or YES. The Status Unit Control Type (CTRL) will be LOCAL OFF when the switch is Off. The Status Unit Control Type will be CCN when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On.

Refer to Appendix F for more detailed instructions regarding global schedules and the i-Vu

CCN Mode

— To allow machine control by CCN commands,

device.

press the Start/Stop button on the Touch Pilot™ display. The Equipment Start screen will be displayed. Select CCN Mode. The unit will be controlled by a CCN command to the CCN Chiller Star t/Stop variable. An external CCN device, such as Chillervisor, controls the On/Off state of the machine. When controlled by a Chillervisor, it is recommended that the Auto Start W hen SM Lost configuration be set to Yes. In the event of a loss of communication with the network, the machine will start and be controlled locally.

Careful evaluation of chilled water plant control should be reviewed. In the event local control is established, be sure that all pumps, valves, and other devices are capable of operating properly. The control will ignore the position of Enable/Off/ Remote Contact switch. The Run Status variable will indicate the current status of the machine — OFF, RUNNING, DELAY, or READY. The Control Type variable will change to CCN. The Operating Type variable will change to CCN.

For dual chiller control applications, the slave chiller must be enabled using the CCN Mode button.

Remote Mode

— To allow machine to start and stop via a remote contact closure, press the Start/Stop button on the Touch Pilot display. The Equipment Start screen will be displayed. Select Remote Mode. The unit will be controlled by the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch (SW1). Switching the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed) will force the unit into an occupied state. In this mode, all CCN network force

Page 23

commands, except the Emergency Stop Command will be

Fig. 17 — Equipment Stop Screen

ignored. The Run Status variable will indicate the current status of the machine (OFF, RUNNING, DELAY, or READY), depending on the position of the Remote/Off/Enable Switch closure. The Chiller Occupied? variable will change to YES. The Control Type variable will change to Remote. The Oper- ating Type variable will change to Remote.

Master Mode

— To activate Dual Chiller Control, each machine must be individually configured for Dual Chiller Control. To operate the machines in Dual Chiller Mode, one machine must be designated as the master unit and one machine as the slave unit. On the master unit, press the Start/Stop button on the Touch Pilot display. The Equipment Start screen will be displayed. Select Master Mode. Failure to start the Master unit in this manner will cause both machines to operate in local mode.

The Master Unit Control can be done locally, remotely or through CCN commands per the master/slave configuration (Master Control Type). The control will ignore the position of Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch if the Master Control

Type is configured for Local Control or CCN Control. The Run Status variable, Chiller Occupied? variable, and Control Type variable will change based on the Master Control Type configured above and the Machine On/Off Control de-

fined above. The Operating Type variable will change to Master.

To Turn Machine Off

— To turn the machine off, press the Start/Stop button on the Touch Pilot display. See Fig. 17. The machine will shut down. While the unit is in Local Off, it will remain shut down and ignore all CCN commands as well as the position of Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch. The Run Status variable, indicating the current status of the machine, will change to OFF. The Chiller Occupied? variable will change to NO. The Control Type variable will indicate Local. The Operating Type variable will change to L-OFF (Local Off).

NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MACHINE CONTROL — Machine On/Off control with the Navigator display is determined by the configuration of the Operating Type Control (OPER). Options to control the machine locally via a switch, from a local Time Schedule, or via a Carrier Comfort Network

com-

mand are offered. See Table 17.

The schedules consist of 8 user-configurable occupied time periods. The control supports time schedules for local control, remote control, and ice building. These time periods can be flagged to be in effect or not in effect on each day of the week. The day begins at 00.00 and ends at 24.00. The machine is in unoccupied mode unless a scheduled time period is in effect. If an occupied period is to extend past midnight, the occupied period must end at 24:00 hours (midnight) and a new occupied period must be programmed to begin at 00:00 hours.

In the following example, a early morning pulldown time period is scheduled for Monday morning from 12:00 AM to 3:00 AM. The occupied period starts at 7:00 AM, Monday through Saturday. The occupied time ends at 6:00 PM on Monday and Tuesday, 9:30 PM on Wednesday, 5:00 PM on Thursday and Friday, and 12:00 PM on Saturday.

NOTE: This schedule was designed to illustrate the programming of the schedule function and is not intended as a recommended schedule for chiller operation.

Switch Control

— In the Switch Control operating type, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch controls the machine locally. All models are factory configured with Operating Type Control (OPER) set to SWITCH CTRL (Switch Control). With SWITCH CTRL, switching the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed) will put the chiller in an occupied state. The Unit Run Status (STAT) will indicate the current status of the machine and will change from OFF to RUNNING or DELAY. The unit Occupied Status (OCC) will change from NO to YES. The Status Unit Control Type (CTRL) will change from LOCAL OFF when the switch is Off to LOCAL ON when in the Enable position or in the Remote Contact position with external contacts closed.

CONTROL

METHOD

(OPER)

Switch

Control

Time

Schedule

CCN

Control

OPERATING

All Local Off

ACTI VE

TYPE

Local On

Local

Schedule

CCN

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

OPER

Operating Control Ty p e

Operating Modes SLCT OPER

Table 17 — Navigator Start/Stop Control

REMOTE/OFF/ENABLE

SWITCH

Off — — — — —

Remote Open — — — — — Off

————Enable——Off —————Yes—Off — — — — — — Closed Off

Enable — — — Disable — — On

Remote Closed — — Disable — — On

Enable — Occupied — Disable — — On

Remote Closed Occupied — Disable — — On

— — Unoccupied — Disable — — Off Remote Closed — Enable Disable — — On Remote Closed — Disable Disable — — Off

Enable — — Enable Disable — — On Enable — — Disable Disable — — Off

REMOTE ON/OFF

SWITCH

TIME SCHEDULE 1

CCN CHILLER

START/STOP

(CHIL_S_S)

EMERGENCY

STOP

(EMSTOP)

ALARM

REMOTE

LOCKOUT

SWITCH

—

SWITCH CTRL

UNIT

STATUS

Off

Page 24

Time Schedule

— With Time Schedule Operating Type control, the machine operates under a local schedule programmed by the user as long as the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch is in the Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed). To operate under this Operating Type Control (OPER) must be set to TIME SCHED (Time Schedule). Two Internal Time Schedules are available and must be field programmed. Time Schedule 1 (SCH1) is used for single set point On-Off control. Time Schedule 2 (SCH2) is used for dual set point On-Off and Occupied-Unoccupied set point control. The control will use the operating schedules as defined under the Time Clock mode in the Navigator display module.

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

OPER

Operating Control Ty pe

Operating Modes SLCT OPER

TIME SCHED

If the chiller is to be controlled to a single set point, use Schedule 1 (SCH1). This type of schedule will start and stop the machine only. During the unoccupied times, the chiller will be off. If the chiller is to be controlled to 2 set points, occupied and unoccupied, use Schedule 2 (SCH2). This will cause the chiller to control to an occupied set point and an unoccupied set point. The machine will be able to provide cooling at any time.

To configure this option while using the Navigator™ display, see Table 18.

Holiday Schedule

— The unit control allows up to 16 holiday periods. All holidays are entered with numerical values. First enter the month (MON.x), then the day (DAY.x), then the duration (DUR.x) of the holiday period in days. If a holiday in included in one of the Occupied Time Periods of the schedule, the machine will follow that operating condition for the holiday. In the following examples, the holidays July 4 and December 25-26 are programmed for Holiday 1 and Holiday 2 respectively.

To configure this option for the Navigator display, see

Table 19. CCN Global Time Schedule

Refer to Appendix F for more detailed instructions regarding global schedules and the i-Vu

device.

Table 18 — Configuring Schedules with

Navigator™ Display

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE OCC.1 Occupied Time UNO.1 Unoccupied Time 03:00 MON.1 Monday Select Yes TUE.1 Tuesday Select No WED.1 Wednesday Select No THU.1 Thursday Select No FRI.1 Friday Select No SAT.1 Saturday Select No SUN.1 Sunday Select No HOL.1 Holiday Select No OCC.2 Occupied Time UNO.2 Unoccupied Time 18:00 MON.2 Monday Select Yes TUE.2 Tuesday Select Yes WED.2 Wednesday Select No THU.2 Thursday Select No FRI.2 Friday Select No SAT.2 Saturday Select No SUN.2 Sunday Select No HOL.2 Holiday Select No OCC.3 Occupied Time UNO.3 Unoccupied Time 21:30 MON.3 Monday Select No TUE.3 Tuesday Select No WED.3 Wednesday Select Yes THU.3 Thursday Select No FRI.3 Friday Select No SAT.3 Saturday Select No SUN.3 Sunday Select No HOL.3 Holiday Select No OCC.4 Occupied Time UNO.4 Unoccupied Time 17:00 MON.4 Monday Select No TUE.4 Tuesday Select No WED.4 Wednesday Select No THU.4 Thursday Select Yes FRI.4 Friday Select Yes SAT.4 Saturday Select No SUN.4 Sunday Select No HOL.4 Holiday Select No OCC.5 Occupied Time UNO.5 Unoccupied Time 12:00 MON.5 Monday Select No TUE.5 Tuesday Select No WED.5 Wednesday Select No THU.5 Thursday Select No FRI.5 Friday Select No SAT.5 Saturday Select Yes SUN.5 Sunday Select No HOL.5 Holiday Select No

Clock SCH1 PER.1

Clock SCH2 PER.1

Clock SCH1 PER.2

Clock SCH2 PER.2

Clock SCH1 PER.3

Clock SCH2 PER.3

Clock SCH1 PER.4

Clock SCH2 PER.4

Clock SCH1 PER.5

Clock SCH2 PER.5

Time

or Time

Time

or Time

Time

or Time

Time

or Time

Time

or Time

00:00

07:00

Table 19 — Configuring Holiday Schedules

for Navigator Display

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

MON.1 Holiday Start Month DAY.1 Holiday Start Day 4 DUR.1 Holiday Duration in Day 1 MON.2 Holiday Start Month DAY.2 Holiday Start Day 25 DUR.2 Holiday Duration in Day 2

Clock HOLI HOL.1

Clock HOLI HOL.2

Time

Page 25

CCN Control

— With CCN Operating Type control, the machine operates under CCN control as long as the Enable/Off/ Remote Contact Switch is in the Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed.) To operate under this Operating Control, OPER must be set to CCN CONTROL. An external CCN device, such as Chillervisor, controls the On/Off state of the machine. When controlled by a Chillervisor, it is recommended that the Auto Start When SM Lost (AU.SM) be set to Yes.

Careful evaluation of Chilled Water Plant control should be reviewed. In the event Local Control is established, be sure that all pumps, valves, and other devices are capable of operating properly. In the event of a loss of communication with the network, the machine will start and be controlled locally. The CCN device forces the variable CHIL_S_S to control the chiller. The Unit Run Status (STAT) will indicate the current status of the machine (OFF, RUNNING, STOPPING or DELAY), depending on the CCN command. The unit Occupied status (OCC) will indicate the current occupied state according to the CCN command and will be displayed as either NO or YES. The Status Unit Control Type (CTRL) will be LOCAL OFF when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch is Off. The Status Unit Control Type will be CCN when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is Closed and the CHIL_S_S variable is Stop or Start.

For Dual Chiller Control applications, the Slave Chiller must be enabled using the CCN CONTROL option.

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

OPER

AU.S M

Operating Control Ty pe

Auto Start when SM Lost

Operating Modes SLCT OPER

Configuration SERV YES

CCN CONTROL

Entering Fluid Control Option — The factory de-

fault for the chilled water fluid set point is controlling to the leaving water temperature. An option to configure the machine for entering water control is available. The control operation remains the same except the control point is focused on the entering water temperature, rather than the leaving water temperature when configured.

To configure this option for the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Entering Fluid Control

Service\ SERVICE1

LINE

NO.

No = Leaving Water Control

Yes = Entering Water Control

VAL UE

To configure this option for the Navigator™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

EWTO Entering Water

Control

Configuration SERV No = Leaving

Water Control Yes = Entering Water Control

Cooling Set Point Selection — Several options for

controlling the Leaving Chilled Water Set Point are offered and are configured by the Cooling Set Point Select (Setpoint Se- lect, SP.SE) variable. In addition to the Cooling Set Point Se- lect, Ice Mode Enable discussed later in this book, and Heat Cool Select (Heat/Cool Select, HC.SE) variables also have a role in determining the set point of the machine. All units are shipped from the factory with the Heat Cool Select set to 0.

All default set points are based on Leaving Water Control (Entering Fluid Control, EWTO) set to No. Values must be confirmed for the individual set points. Limits for the set points are listed in the configurations noted below.

To configure these options for the Touch Pilot display, see Table 20A. To configure these options for the Navigator display, see Table 20B.

Table 20A — Cooling Set Point Selection

with Touch Pilot Display

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Cooling Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Range: 14 to 70 F

Cooling Setpoint 2 Setpoint 3 Range: 14 to 70 F

Cooling Ice Setpoint Setpoint 4 Range: -20 to 32 F

(–10.0 to 21.1 C) Default: 44 F (6.6 C)

(–28.9 to 0 C) Default: 44 F (6.6 C)

Table 20B — Cooling Set Point Selection

with Navigator Display

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1 Setpoints COOL

CSP.2 Cooling Setpoint 2 Setpoints COOL

CSP.3 Ice Setpoint Setpoints COOL

Range: 14 to 70 F (–10.0 to 21.1 C) Default: 44 F (6.6 C)

Range: -20 to 32 F (–28.9 to 0 C) Default: 44 F (6.6 C)

In all cases, there are limits on what values are allowed for each set point. These values depend on the Cooler Fluid Type and the Brine Freeze Set point, discussed later. See Table 21.

Table 21 — Configuration Set Point Limits

COOLER FLUID TYPE

SET POINT LIMITS

Minimum * 38 F (3.3 C) 14 F (–10.0 C) Maximum 60 F (15.5 C)

*The minimum set point for Medium Temperature Brine applications

is related to the Brine Freeze Point. The set point is limited to be no less than the Brine Freeze Point +5° F (2.8° C).

(COOLER FLUID TYPE, FLUD)

1, Water 2, Brine

The Setpoint Select configuration can be set to five different control options: Set Point Occupancy, Set Point 1, Set Point 2, 4-20 mA Input, and Dual Switch.

CAUTION

Brine duty application (below 40 F [4.4 C] LCWT) for chiller normally requires factory modification. Contact a Carrier Representative for details regarding specific applications. Operation below 40 F (4.4 C) LCWT without modification can result in compressor failure.

SET POINT OCCUPANCY — Set Point Occupancy is the default configuration for the Setpoint Select variable. When Setpoint Select (Setpoint Select, SP.SE) is configured to 0 (Setpoint Occ), the unit’s active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Cooling Setpoint 1, CSP.1) during the occupied period while operating under Time Schedule 1 (SCH1). If the Time Schedule 2 (SCH2) is in use, the unit’s active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Cooling Setpoint 1, CSP.1) dur- ing the occupied period and Cooling Set Point 2 (Cooling Set- point 2, CSP.2) during the unoccupied period. See Tables 22 and 23.

To configure this option while using a Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Setpoint select Status GENUNIT 25 0 (Setpoint Occupied)

To change this value, a Control Point Force must be applied. When configured correctly, Setpoint Control (Setpoint Con- trol, SP.SE) will indicate Auto.

To configure this option while using a Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

SP.SE Setpoint Select Operating Modes SLCT Setpoint Occ

Page 26

Table 22 — Cooling Set Point Selection Touch Pilot™ Parameters

SET POINT

CONFIGURATION

(Setpoint Select)

(Auto)

1 (Setp 1) — — — — Cooling Setpoint 1 2 (Setp 2) — — — — Cooling Setpoint 2

3 (4-20 mA) — — — — 4 to 20 mA Input

4 (Setp Sw)

ICE MODE

ENABLE

(ice_cnfg)

YES

DUAL SET

POINT INPUT

(SETP_SW)

— — Occupied Cooling Setpoint 1 — — Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 2 — Open Unoccupied Cooling Ice Setpoint — Closed Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint 2 — — Occupied Cooling Setpoint 1

Open — — Cooling Setpoint 1

Closed — — Cooling Setpoint 2

Open — — Cooling Setpoint 1 Closed Open — Cooling Ice Setpoint Closed Closed — Cooling Setpoint 2

ICE DONE INPUT

(ICE_SW)

TIME

SCHEDULE 2

Table 23 — Cooling Set Point Selection Navigator™ Parameters

PARAMETER STATUS

Control Method

(OPER)

LOCAL COOL

CCN COOL

Select (HC.SE)

Heat/Cool

Setpoint

Select (SP.SE)

Setpoint Occ — — — Occupied CSP.1 Setpoint Occ — — — Unoccupied CSP.2 Setpoint Occ Enable Open — Unoccupied CSP.3

Setpoint 1 — — — — CSP.1 Setpoint 2 — — — — CSP.2

4-20mA Setp — — — — 4_20mA

— Enable Open Closed — CSP.3 — Enable Closed Closed — CSP.2 — — — Open — CSP.1

Dual Setp Sw — — Closed — CSP.2

— — — — Occupied CSP.1 — — — — Unoccupied CSP.2

Ice Mode

Enable (ICE.M)

Ice Done

(ICE.D)

Dual Setpoint

Switch (DUAL)

Setpoint

Occupied

(SP.OC)

ACTIVE

SET POINT

ACTIVE

SET POINT

Set Point 1

— When Set Point Select (Setpoint Select, SP.SE) is configured to 1 (Setpoint 1), the unit’s active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Cooling Setpoint 1, CSP.1).

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Setpoint Select Status GENUNIT 25 1 (Set Point 1)

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

To change this value, a Control Point Force must be applied. When configured correctly, Setpoint Control will indicate Setp 1.

To configure this option with the Navigator™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

SP.SE Setpoint Select Operating Modes SLCT Setpoint 1

Set Point 2

— When Set Point Select (Setpoint Select, SP.SE) is configured to 2 (Setpoint 2), the unit’s active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 2 (Cooling Setpoint 2, CSP.2).

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Setpoint Select Status GENUNIT 25 2 (Set Point 2)

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

To change this value, a Control Point Force must be applied. When configured correctly, Setpoint Control (Status GENUNIT) will indicate Setp 2.

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

SP.SE Setpoint Select Operating Modes SLCT Setpoint 2

4 to 20 mA Input

— When Set Point Select (Setpoint Select, SP.SE) is configured to 3 (4-20 mA Setp), the unit’s active set point is based on an field supplied, external 4 to 20 mA signal input to the Energy Management Module (EMM). Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufacturer’s control systems, due to power supply differences of full wave bridge versus half wave rectification. The two different power supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink™ controls use half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if a full wave bridge signal generating device is used.

The following equation is used to control the set point. See

Fig. 18.

Fahrenheit Set Point = 10 + 70(mA – 4)/16 (deg F) Celsius Set Point = –12.2 + 38.9(mA – 4)/16 (deg C) To configure this option while using a Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Setpoint Select Status GENUNIT 25 3 (4-20 mA Input)

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

To change this value, a Control Point Force must be applied. When configured correctly, Setpoint Control will indicate 4-20 mA.

Page 27

To configure this option while using a Navigator display:

Fig. 18 — 4 to 20 mA Set Point Control

10 12 14 16 18 20

mA Signal

Set Point

Min LWT, Cooler Fluid Type = 1, FLUD=Brine

Min LWT, Cooler Fluid Type = 1, FLUD=Water

02468

Max LWT

A30-4830

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

SP.SE Setpoint Select Operating Modes SLCT 4-20 mA Setp

Dual Switch

— When Set Point Select (Setpoint Select, SP.SE) is configured to 4 (Dual Setp Sw), the unit’s active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Cooling Setpoint 1, CSP.1) when the Dual Set Point switch contact is open and Cooling Set Point 2 (Cooling Setpoint 2, CSP.2) when it is closed.

To configure this option while using a Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Setpoint Select Status GENUNIT 25

LINE

NO.

4 (Dual Setpoint Switch)

VAL UE

To change this value, a Control Point Force must be applied. When configured correctly, Setpoint Control will indicate Setp Sw.

To configure this option while using a Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

SP.SE Setpoint Select Operating Modes SLCT

Dual Setp Sw

Chilled Water Fluid Type Selection — The chilled

water fluid must be configured. The fluid type must be configured to obtain the proper leaving water set point control range and freeze protection. The Cooler Fluid Type (Cooler Fluid Type , FLUD) can be set to water or brine.

FRESH WATER — Configure the unit for Cooler Fluid Type (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD) to water for units without brine or glycol installed in the chilled water loop. The factory default fluid type is fresh water. Use this option for fresh water systems. This will allow for a water temperature set point of 38 to 60 F (3.3 to 15.5 C). With water as the selection, the Freeze Point is fixed at 34 F (1.1 C).

DISPLAY

NAME

Cooler Fluid Type

PATH

Main Menu Service SERVICE1 1 1 = Water

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

FLUD Cooler Fluid Type Configuration SERV Water

BRINE OR GLYCOL OPERATION — Configure the unit for Cooler Fluid Type (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD) to brine for brine or glycol chilled water loops. This option will allow for a set point temperature range of 14 to 60 F (–10.0 to 15.5 C). Before configuring this selection, confirm that a suitable antifreeze has been added and is at a sufficient concentration to protect the loop. Additionally, the Brine Freeze Set Point (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP) must be set for proper freeze protection operation. Set the Brine Freeze Set Point to the burst protection provided by the glycol concentration. This value will be Freeze Point for the fluid.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY

NAME

Cooler Fluid Type

Brine Freeze Setpoint

PATH

Main Menu

Service SERVICE1

Main Menu

Service SERVICE1

LINE

NO.

12 = Brine

VALU E

Dependent on fluid concentration

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

FLUD Cooler Fluid Type Configuration SERV Brine

LOSP

Brine Freeze Setpoint

Configuration SERV

Dependent on fluid concentration

Page 28

Cooler Pump Control — It is required for all chillers

that the cooler pump control be utilized unless the chilled water pump runs continuously or the chilled water system contains a suitable concentration of antifreeze solution. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is configured, the cooler pump output will be energized when the chiller enters an "ON" mode. The cooler pump output is also energized when certain alarms are generated. The cooler pump output should be used as an override to the external pump control if cooler pump control is not utilized. The cooler pump output is energized if a P.01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection alarm is generated, which provides additional freeze protection if the system is not protected with a suitable antifreeze solution.

The 30XW units can be configured for external cooler pump control. Cooler Pumps Sequence is the variable that must be confirmed in the field. Proper configuration of the cooler pump control is required to provide reliable chiller operation. The factory default setting for Cooler Pumps Sequence is 0 (No Pump). The configuration settings for Cooler Pumps Sequence are 1 (1 pump only) for single pump control and 2 (2 pumps auto). Configuration settings 3 (PMP 1 Manual) and 4 (PMP 2 Manual) are for dual pump control only.

If the Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) is set to 1, the control will start the pump. If a flow failure is detected, the unit will shut down and must be manually reset. If the Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) is set to 2, the control will start the lead pump and automatically alternate the operation of the pumps to even the wear. If a flow failure is detected, the unit will shut down and the lag pump will attempt to start. If flow is established within the Unit Off to On Delay (DELY) period the unit will restart automatically.

Two manual control options are also available. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) is set to 3, Cooler Pump 1 will always operate. If a flow failure is detected, the unit will shut down and must be manually reset. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) is set to 4, Cooler Pump 2 will always operate. If a flow failure is detected, the unit will shut down and must be manually reset.

For all Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) settings (including

0), closure of both the chilled water flow switch (CWFS) and the chilled water pump interlock contact (connected across TB5 terminals 1 and 2) are required. In addition, for Cooler Pumps Sequence settings of PUMP = 1, 2, 3, 4, normally open auxiliary contacts for Pump 1 and Pump 2 (wired in parallel) must be connected to the violet and pink wires located in the harness from the MBB-J5C-CH18 connector. The wires in the harness are marked "PMP1-13" and "PMP1-14". See the field wiring diagram in the 30XW Installation Instructions.

Regardless of the cooler pump control option selected, if the chilled water flow switch/interlock does not close within the Unit Off to On Delay period after the unit is enabled and in an ON mode, alarm P.91 will be generated. Other conditions which will trigger this alarm include:

• Cooler pump interlock is open for at least 15 seconds during

chiller operation.

• Lag chiller in Master/Slave Control pump interlock does not

close after 1 minute of the pump start command.

• Cooler pump control is enabled and the chilled water flow

switch/interlock is closed for more than 2 minutes following

a command to shut down the pump.

The last alarm criterion can be disabled. If Flow Checked if Pmp Off (Configuration OPTN P.LOC) is set to NO, the control will ignore the pump interlock input if the cooler pump output is OFF.

The ComfortLink™ controls have the ability to periodically start the pumps to maintain the bearing lubrication and seal integrity. If Pump Sticking Protection (Configuration OPTN PM.PS) is set to YES, and if the unit is off at 2:00 PM, a pump will be started once each day for 2 seconds. If the unit has

2 pumps, Pump 1 will be started on even days (such as day 2, 4, or 6 of the month); Pump 2 will be started on odd days. The default for this option is PM.PS=NO.

The pump will continue to run for 60 seconds after an off

command is issued. COOLER PUMP CONTROL CONFIGURATIONS No Pump Control

— To configure cooler pump control op-

tions with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Cooler Pumps Sequence

Main Menu Config USER

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

0 (No Pump Control)

To configure cooler pump control options with the Naviga-

tor™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

PUMP

Single Pump Control

Cooler Pumps Sequence

Configuration OPTN No Pump

— To configure cooler pump control

options with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Cooler Pumps Sequence

Pump Sticking Protection

Flow Checked if C Pump Off

Main Menu Config USER

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

1 (Single Pump Control)

Default = No No = Disabled Yes = Enabled

Default = Yes No = Disabled Yes = Enabled

To configure cooler pump control options with the Naviga-

tor display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

Cooler Pumps

PUMP

Sequence

Periodic Pump

PM.PS

Start

Flow Checked

P. LO C

if Pmp Off

Dual Pump and Manual Control

Configuration OPTN 1 Pump Only

Configuration OPTN

Default = No No = Disabled Yes = Enabled

Default = Yes No = Disabled Yes = Enabled

— To configure cooler

pump control options with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Cooler Pumps Sequence

Pump Auto Rotation Delay

Pump Sticking Protection

Flow Checked if C Pump Off

Main Menu

Config USER

Main Menu

Config USER

Main Menu

Config USER

Main Menu

Config USER

LINE

NO.

14 Default = 48 hours

VAL UE

2 (2 Pumps Automatic) 3 (Pump 1 Manual) 4 (Pump 2 Manual)

Default = No No = Disabled Yes = Enabled

Default = Yes No = Disabled Yes = Enabled

To configure cooler pump control options with the Naviga-

tor™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

PUMP

ROT.P

PM.PS

P. LO C

Cooler Pumps Sequence

Pump Rotation Delay

Periodic Pump Start

Flow Checked if Pmp Off

Configuration OPTN

2 Pumps Auto PMP1 Manual PMP2 Manual

Default = 48 hours

Default = No No = Disabled Yes = Enabled

Default = Yes No = Disabled Yes = Enabled

Page 29

Machine Start Delay — An option to delay the start of

the machine is also available. This parameter is useful in keeping multiple machines from starting at the same time in case of a power failure. The parameter has a factory default of 1 minute. This parameter also has a role in the timing for a chilled water flow switch alarm. The flow switch status is not checked until the delay time has elapsed.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Unit Off to On Delay

Main Menu

Config USER

LINE

NO.

6 Default = 1 Minute

VAL UE

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

DELY Minutes Off Time Configuration OPTN

Default = 1 Minute

Circuit/Compressor Staging and Loading —

The AquaForce® 30XW chillers employ one compressor per circuit. As a result, circuit and compressor staging are the same. The control has several control option parameters to load the compressors. The circuit/compressor start can be configured as well as the loading of each circuit/compressor.

CIRCUIT/COMPRESSOR STAGING — The control can be configured to decide which circuit/compressor starts first, by configuring Lead/Lag Circuit Select (Staged Loading Sequence, LLCS). Three options for this variable are allowed: Automatic Lead-Lag, Circuit A Leads or Circuit B Leads. The factory default is Automatic Lead-Lag.

The automatic lead-lag function determines which circuit/ compressor starts. When enabled, the control will determine which circuit/compressor starts to even the wear of the compressor. The compressor wear factor (combination of starts and run hours) is used to determine which compressor starts.

Compressor Wear Factor = (Compressor Starts) + 0.1 (Compressor Run Hours)

The circuit/compressor with the lowest compressor wear factor is the circuit that starts first.

If starting a particular circuit/compressor first is desired, that can also be configured with the same variable.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Circuit Loading Sequence

Main Menu

Config USER

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

Lead/Lag

LLCS

Circuit Select

CIRCUIT/COMPRESSOR LOADING — The control can be configured to stage the circuit/compressors. The Loading Sequence Select (Circuit Loading Sequence, LOAD) setting determines how the control will perform loading. The configuration can be set to Equal or Staged.

Equal Loading

— With Equal loading, the circuit which starts first will maintain the minimum stage of capacity with the slide valve fully unloaded. When additional capacity is required, the next circuit with the lowest compressor wear factor is started with its slide valve at minimum position. As additional capacity is required, the slide valve for a circuit will be adjusted in approximately 5% increments to match capacity requirements.

LINE

NO.

Configuration

OPTN

VAL UE

0 (Automatic Lead-lag) 1 (Circuit A Leads) 2 (Circuit B Leads) Default = 0 (Automatic Lead-lag)

Range: Automatic, Cir A Leads, Cir B Leads, Cir C Leads Default – Automatic

The control will alternate between circuits to maintain the same percentage of capacity on each circuit.

Staged Loading

— If staged loading is selected, the circuit which starts first will gradually load its slide valve to match capacity requirements until the circuit is fully loaded. Once the circuit is fully loaded and additional capacity is required, the control will start an additional circuit fully unloaded. The control will gradually unload the circuit which was fully loaded to match capacity requirements.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Staged Loading Sequence

Main Menu Config USER

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

Default = No No (Equal) Yes (Staged)

To configure this option with the Navigator™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

Loading Sequence

LOAD

Select

Configuration OPTN

Default = Equal Equal Staged

Minimum Load Control — Minimum Load Control

can be a factory-installed option or a field-installed accessory. If installed, and its operation is desired, the Minimum Load Control must be enabled. Once enabled, the valve will be operational only during the first stage of cooling.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Hot Gas Bypass Select

Main Menu Service

FAC TORY

LINE

NO.

Default = No No (No Minimum

Load Control) Yes (Minimum Load Control Installed)

VAL UE

A power cycle is required for the values to take effect. To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM

HGBP

ITEM

EXPANSION

Hot Gas Bypass Select

PATH VALUE

Configuration UNIT

No = No Minimum Load Control Yes = Minimum Load Control Installed

A power cycle is required for the values to take effect.

Dual Chiller Control — The dual chiller routine is

available for the control of two units installed in series or parallel supplying chilled fluid on a common loop. One chiller must be configured as the master chiller, the other as the slave chiller. An additional leaving fluid temperature thermistor (dual chiller LWT) must be installed in the common chilled water piping as described in the Installation Instructions for both the master and slave chillers. See the Field Wiring section in the 30XW Installation Instructions for dual chiller LWT sensor control wiring.

The control algorithm relies on several parameters that must be field configured for operation. Both chillers must be on the same Carrier Comfort Network On both chillers, Master/Slave Select (Master/Slave Select, MSSL) must be enabled. The water piping arrangement, Chillers in Series (Chiller in Series, SERI), must be configured. The master chiller must be programmed with the Slave Chiller Address (Slave Address, SLVA). Additional optional pro- gramming parameters may be configured to meet application requirements.

Lead/Lag Balance Select (Lead Lag Select, LLBL) determines which chiller is the lead machine. The options are Always Lead, Lag if Fail, and Runtime Select. Under Runtime Select control, the lead chiller will change based on the time increment selected in the Lead/Lag Balance Delta configuration (Lead/Lag Balance Data, LLBD). If the run hour difference

bus with different addresses.

Page 30

between the master and the slave remains less than the Lead/ Lag Balance Delta, the chiller designated as the lead will remain the lead chiller. The Lead/Lag changeover between the master and the slave chiller due to hour balance will occur during chiller operating odd days, such as day 1, day 3, and day 5 of the month, at 12:00 a.m. If a lead chiller is not designated, the master chiller will always be designated the lead chiller.

The dual chiller control algorithm has the ability to delay the start of the lag chiller in two ways. The Lead Pulldown Time parameter (Lead Pulldown Type, LPUL) is a one-time time delay initiated after starting the lead chiller, before checking whether to start an additional chiller. This time delay gives the lead chiller a chance to remove the heat that the chilled water loop picked up while being inactive during an unoccupied period. The second time delay, Lead/Lag Delay (Lag Start Timer, LLDY) is a time delay imposed between the last stage of the lead chiller and the start of the lag chiller. This prevents enabling the lag chiller until the lead/lag delay timer has expired.

A quicker start of the lag chiller can be accomplished by configuring the Start if Error Higher parameter (Start if Erro r Higher, LL.ER). If the difference between the common leav- ing water temperature and the set point is greater than the configured value, then the lag chiller will start.

A minimum on time for the lag chiller can be programmed with the Lag Minimum Running Time configuration (Lag

Minimum Running Time, LAG.M). This parameter causes the control to run the lag chiller for the programmed minimum on time. The Lag Unit Pump Select (Lag Unit Pump Control, LAGP) can be configured such that the pump can be on or off while the chiller is off. This parameter is only active in Parallel Chiller Operation.

For units with a Touch Pilot display, two additional steps must be completed to start the machine. On the master chiller, the Master Control Type must be configured for the start control defined in the Machine Control configuration. To start the machines, the master chiller must be started with the Start/Stop button and Master Mode selected. The slave chiller must be started with the CCN Mode selected.

Each application, Parallel and Series, are described separately below.

DUAL CHILLER CONTROL FOR PARALLEL APPLICATIONS — To configure the master chiller for parallel applications using the Touch Pilot display, see Table 24. To configure the master chiller for parallel applications using the Navigator display, see Table 25. A power cycle is required for the values to take effect.

To configure the slave chiller for parallel applications using the Touch Pilot display, see Table 26. To configure the slave chiller for parallel applications using the Navigator display, see Table 27.

Page 31

Table 24 — Dual Master Chiller Control Parameters for Parallel Applications with Touch Pilot™ Display

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Master/Slave Select Main Menu Config MST_SLV 3

Master Control Type Main Menu Config MST_SLV 7

Slave Address Main Menu Config MST_SLV 11

Lead Lag Select Main Menu Config MST_SLV 12

Lead/Lag Balance Delta Main Menu Config MST_SLV 16

Lag Start Timer Main Menu Config MST_SLV 17

Lead Pulldown Time Main Menu Config MST_SLV 18

Start If Error Higher Main Menu Config MST_SLV 19

Lag Minimum Running Time Main Menu Config MST_SLV 20

Lag Unit Pump Control Main Menu Config MST_SLV 21

Chiller In Series Main Menu Config MST_SLV 22

1 (Master) Default: 0 (Disable)

1=Local Control 2=Remote Control 3=CCN Control Default: 1 Configure for proper control type.

Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2

0 (Master Always Leads) 1 (Lag Once Failed Only) 2 (Lead/Lag Runtime Select) Default: 0 (Master Always Leads)

Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours

Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes

Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes

Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)

Range: 0 to 150 minutes Default: 0 minutes

0 (Stop If Unit Stops) 1 (Run If Unit Stops) Default: 0 (Stop If Unit Stops)

Default: No Value: No

Page 32

Table 25 — Dual Master Chiller Control Parameters for Parallel Applications with Navigator™ Display

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

MSSL Master/Slave Select Configuration RSET

SLVA Slave Address Configuration RSET

LLBL Master Lead Lag Select Configuration RSET

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta Configuration RSET

LLDY Lag Start Delay Configuration RSET

LL.ER Start If Error Higher Configuration RSET

LAG.M Lag Unit Pump Select Configuration RSET

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time Configuration RSET

SERI Chillers in Series Configuration RSET

OPER Operating Control Type Operating Modes SLCT Set to desired control

Master Default: Disable

Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2

Range: Always Lead, Lag if Fail, Runtime Sel Default: Always Lead

Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours

Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes

Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)

Range: Off If U Stp, On If U Stop Default: Off If U Stp

Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes

No Default: No

Table 26 — Dual Slave Chiller Control Parameters for Parallel Applications with Touch Pilot™ Display

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Master/Slave Select Main Menu Config MST_SLV 3

Master Control Type Main Menu Config MST_SLV 7

Slave Address Main Menu Config MST_SLV 11

Lead Lag Select Main Menu Config MST_SLV 12

Lead/Lag Balance Delta Main Menu Config MST_SLV 16

Lag Start Timer Main Menu Config MST_SLV 17

Lead Pulldown Time Main Menu Config MST_SLV 18

Start If Error Higher Main Menu Config MST_SLV 19

Lag Minimum Running Time Main Menu Config MST_SLV 20

Lag Unit Pump Control Main Menu Config MST_SLV 21

Chiller In Series Main Menu Config MST_SLV 22

2 (Slave) Default: 0 (Disable)

1 (Local Control) 2 (Remote Control) 3 (CCN Control) Default: 1 Configure for proper control type.

Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2

0 (Master Always Leads) 1 (Lag Once Failed Only) 2 (Lead/Lag Runtime Select) Default: 0 (Master Always Leads)

Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours

Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes

Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes

Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)

Range: 0 to 150 minutes Default: 0 minutes

0 (Stop If Unit Stops) 1 (Run If Unit Stops) Default: 0 (Stop If Unit Stops)

No Default: No

Page 33

DUAL CHILLER PUMP CONTROL FOR PARALLEL CHILLER APPLICATIONS — It is recommended that a dedicated pump be used for each unit. The chiller must start and stop its own water pump located on its own piping. If pumps are not dedicated for each chiller, chiller isolation valves are required and each chiller must open and close its own isolation valve.

configure the master chiller for series applications using the Navigator™ display, see Table 29. A power cycle is required for the values to take effect.

To configure the slave chiller for series applications using the Touch Pilot™ display, see Table 30. To configure the slave chiller for series applications using the Navigator™ display, see Table 31.

DUAL CHILLER CONTROL FOR SERIES APPLICATIONS — To configure the master chiller for series applications using the Touch Pilot™ display, see Table 28. To

Table 27 — Dual Slave Chiller Control Parameters for Parallel Applications with Navigator™ Display

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

MSSL Master/Slave Select Configuration RSET

SLVA Slave Address Configuration RSET

LLBL Master Lead Lag Select Configuration RSET

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta Configuration RSET

LLDY Lag Start Delay Configuration RSET

LL.ER Start If Error Higher Configuration RSET

LAG.M Lag Unit Pump Select Configuration RSET

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time Configuration RSET

SERI Chillers in Series Configuration RSET

OPER Operating Control Type Operating Modes SLCT CCN Control

Slave Default: Disable

Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2

Range: Always Lead, Lag if Fail, Runtime Sel Default: Always Lead

Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours

Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes

Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)

Range: Off If U Stp, On If U Stop Default: Off If U Stp

Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes

No, Default: No

Table 28 — Dual Master Chiller Control Parameters for Series Applications with Touch Pilot Display

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Master/Slave Select Main Menu Config MST_SLV 3

Master Control Type Main Menu Config MST_SLV 7

Slave Address Main Menu Config MST_SLV 11

Lead Lag Select Main Menu Config MST_SLV 12

Lead/Lag Balance Delta Main Menu Config MST_SLV 16

Lag Start Timer Main Menu Config MST_SLV 17

Lead Pulldown Time Main Menu Config MST_SLV 18

Start If Error Higher Main Menu Config MST_SLV 19

Lag Minimum Running Time Main Menu Config MST_SLV 20

Lag Unit Pump Control Main Menu Config MST_SLV 21

Chiller In Series Main Menu Config MST_SLV 22

1 (Master) Default: 0 (Disable)

1 (Local Control) 2 (Remote Control) 3 (CCN Control) Default: 1 (Local Control) Value: Configure for proper control type.

Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2

0 (Master Always Leads) 1 (Lag Once Failed Only) 2 (Lead/Lag Runtime Select) Default: 0 (Master Always Leads)

Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours

Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes

Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes

Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)

Range: 0 to 150 minutes Default: 0 minutes

0 (Stop If Unit Stops) 1 (Run If Unit Stops) Default: 0 (Stop If Unit Stops)

Ye s Default: No

Page 34

Table 29 — Dual Master Chiller Control Parameters for Series Applications with Navigator™ Display

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

MSSL Master/Slave Select Configuration RSET

SLVA Slave Address Configuration RSET

LLBL Master Lead Lag Select Configuration RSET

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta Configuration RSET

LLDY Lag Start Delay Configuration RSET

LL.ER Start If Error Higher Configuration RSET

LAG.M Lag Unit Pump Select Configuration RSET

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time Configuration RSET

SERI Chillers in Series Configuration RSET

OPER Operating Control Type Operating Modes SLCT Set to desired value

Master Default: Disable

Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2

Range: Always Lead, Lag if Fail, Runtime Sel Default: Always Lead

Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours

Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes

Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)

Range: Off If U Stp, On If U Stop Default: Off If U Stp

Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes

YES Default: NO

Table 30 — Dual Slave Chiller Control Parameters for Series Applications with Touch Pilot™ Display

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Master/Slave Select Main Menu Config MST_SLV 3

Master Control Type Main Menu Config MST_SLV 7

Slave Address Main Menu Config MST_SLV 11

Lead Lag Select Main Menu Config MST_SLV 12

Lead/Lag Balance Delta Main Menu Config MST_SLV 16

Lag Start Timer Main Menu Config MST_SLV 17

Lead Pulldown Time Main Menu Config MST_SLV 18

Start If Error Higher Main Menu Config MST_SLV 19

Lag Minimum Running Time Main Menu Config MST_SLV 20

Lag Unit Pump Control Main Menu Config MST_SLV 21

Chiller In Series Main Menu Config MST_SLV 22

2 (Slave) Default: 0 (Disable)

1 (Local Control) 2 (Remote Control) 3 (CCN Control) Default: 1 (Local Control) Value: Configure for proper control type.

Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2

0 (Master Always Leads) 1 (Lag Once Failed Only) 2 (Lead/Lag Runtime Select) Default: 0 (Master Always Leads)

Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours

Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes

Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes

Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)

Range: 0 to 150 minutes Default: 0 minutes

0 (Stop If Unit Stops) 1 (Run If Unit Stops) Default: 0 (Stop If Unit Stops)

Ye s Default: No

Page 35

Table 31 — Dual Slave Chiller Control Parameters for Series Applications with Navigator Display

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

MSSL Master/Slave Select Configuration RSET

SLVA Slave Address Configuration RSET

LLBL Master Lead Lag Select Configuration RSET

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta Configuration RSET

LLDY Lag Start Delay Configuration RSET

LL.ER Start If Error Higher Configuration RSET

LAG.M Lag Unit Pump Select Configuration RSET

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time Configuration RSET

SERI Chillers in Series Configuration RSET

OPER Operating Control Type Operating Modes SLCT CCN Control

Slave Default: Disable

Must be set to the Slave Chiller’s address. The master and slave chiller must have different addresses and be on the same Bus Number Default: 2

Range: Always Lead, Lag if Fail, Runtime Sel Default: Always Lead

Range: 40 to 400 hours Default: 168 hours

Range: 2 to 30 minutes Default: 10 minutes

Range: 3.0 to 18 F (1.7 to 10.0 C) Default: 4.0 F (2.2 C)

Range: Off If U Stp, On If U Stop Default: Off If U Stp

Range: 0 to 60 minutes Default: 0 minutes

YES Default: NO

DUAL CHILLER PUMP CONTROL FOR SERIES CHILLER APPLICATIONS — Pump control for series chiller applications is controlled by the master chiller only. The control of the slave chiller is directed through commands emitted by the master chiller. The slave chiller has no action in master/slave operations. The slave chiller only verifies that CCN communication with the master chiller is present. See the Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation section on page 54.

Ramp Loading — Ramp Loading limits the rate of

change of the leaving fluid temperature. If the unit is in a Cooling mode and configured for Ramp Loading Select (Ramp Loading Select, RL.S), the control makes two comparisons before deciding to increase capacity. First, the control calculates the temperature difference between the control point and leaving fluid temperature. If the difference is greater than 4° F (2.2° C) and the rate of change (°F or °C per minute) is more than the configured Cool Ramp Loading rate (Cooling Ramp Loading, CRMP), then the control does not allow any increase of capacity.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Ramp Loading Select

Cooling Ramp Loading

Main Menu

Config USER

Main Menu

Setpoint

5Yes

Range: 0.2 to 2.0 °F

(0.1 to 1.1 °C) Default: 1.0 °F (0.5 °C)

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM

RL.S

CRMP

ITEM

EXPANSION

Ramp Load Select

Cool Ramp Loading

PATH VALUE

Configuration OPTN Yes

Setpoints COOL

Range: 0.2 to 2.0 °F (0.1 to 1.1 °C) Default: 1.0 °F (0.5 °C)

Temperature Reset — Temperature reset is a value

added to the basic leaving fluid temperature set point and the resulting sum of these values is the new control point. When a non-zero temperature reset is applied, the chiller controls to the new control point, not the set point. The type of temperature reset is configured with the Cooling Reset Type (Cooling Reset Select, CRST) variable. Types of temperature reset are avail- able: Return Water Reset, Space Temperature Reset, and 4-20 mA Temperature Reset.

Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant entering or leaving fluid temperature, based on the configuration, approximately equal to the chilled fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the cooler fluid temperature difference will change in proportion to the load. For example, if the chiller was selected for a Entering to Leaving Water Temperature difference of 10 F (5.5 C) at full load, at 50% load the temperature difference would be 5 F (2.2 C). See Fig. 19. Because the change in temperature through the cooler is a measure of the building load, the temperature difference reset is the average building load. Usually the chiller size and fluid temperature set point are selected based on a full-load condition. At part load, the fluid temperature set point may be lower than required. If the fluid temperature were allowed to increase at part load, the efficiency of the machine would increase. The chiller can also be set for return water temperature control. See Fig. 20.

Other indirect means of estimating building load and controlling temperature reset are also available and are discussed below.

To verify that reset is functioning correctly, subtract the Setpoint Select (Current Setpoint, SETP) from the Control Point (Control Point, CTPT) to determine the degrees reset.

RETURN WATER RESET — The control system is capable of performing fluid temperature reset based on cooler fluid temperature difference. Because the change in temperature through the cooler is a measure of the building load, the temperature difference reset is, in effect, an average building load reset method.

Return Water Temperature Reset allows for the chilled water temperature set point to be reset upward as a function of the fluid temperature difference (building load).

NOTE: Return Water Temperature Reset should not be used with variable cooler flow rate systems.

To use Return Water Temperature Reset, four variables must be configured. Cooling Reset Type (Cooling Reset Select, CRST) must be enabled. The variable Delta T No Reset Tem p ( Delta T No Reset Value, CRT1) should be set to the cooler temperature difference (T) where no chilled water temperature reset should occur. The variable Delta T Full Reset Tem p ( Delta T Full Reset Value, CRT2) should be set to the cooler temperature difference where the maximum chilled water temperature reset should occur. The variable Degrees Cool Reset (Cooling Reset Deg. Value, DGRC) should be set to the maximum amount of reset desired.

Page 36

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Cooling Reset Select

Delta T No Reset Temp

Delta T Full Reset Temp

Cooling Reset Deg. Value

Main Menu Config USER

Main Menu Setpoint SETPOINT

Default =0 (No Reset) 2 (Delta T)

Default = 0 F (0 C)

To configure this option with the Navigator™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

CRST

CRT1

CRT2

DGRC

Cooling Reset Ty pe

Delta T No Reset Temp

Delta T Full Reset Temp

Degrees Cool Reset

Configuration RSET

Setpoints COOL

Default = No Reset Delta T Temp

Default = 0 F (0 C)

In the example in Fig. 21 using Return Water Temperature Reset, the chilled water temperature will be reset by 5° F (2.8° C) when the Fluid Temperature Difference is 2° F (1.1° C) and 0° F (0° C) reset when the Temperature Difference is 10° F.

SPACE TEMPERATURE RESET — The control system is also capable of temperature reset based on space temperature (SPT). An accessory sensor must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The Energy Management Module (EMM) is also required for temperature reset using space temperature.

To use Space Temperature Reset, four variables must be configured. Cooling Reset Type (Cooling Reset Select, CRST) must be enabled. The space temperature at which no temperature reset is required, Space T No Reset Temp (Space T No Reset Value, CRS1) must be set. The space temperature at which full temperature reset is required, Space T Full Reset Tem p ( Space T Full Reset Value, CRS2) must be set. Finally, the amount of temperature reset desired, Degrees Cool Reset (Cooling Reset Deg. Value, DRGC), must be set.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Cooling Reset Select

Space T No Reset Value

Space T Full Reset Value

Cooling Reset Deg. Value

Main Menu

Config USER

Main Menu

Setpoint SETPOINT

Main Menu

Setpoint SETPOINT

Main Menu

Setpoint SETPOINT

LINE

NO.

VAL UE

Default =0 (No Reset) 4 (Space Temp)

Default = 14 F (–10 C)

Default = 0 F (0 C)

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

CRST Cooling Reset Type Configuration RSET

Space T No Reset

CRS1

Te mp Space T Full Reset

CRS2

Te mp

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Setpoints COOL

Setpoints COOL

Default = No Reset Space Temp

Default = 14 F (–10 C)

Default = 0 F (0 C)

In the space temperature reset example in Fig. 22, 0° F (0° C) chilled water set point reset at 72 F (22.2 C) space temperature and 6° F (3.3° C) reset at 68 F (20.0 C) space temperature.

4-20 mA TEMPERATURE RESET — The control system is also capable of temperature reset based on an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. The Energy Management Module (EMM) is required for temperature reset using a 4 to 20 mA signal.

To use 4-20 mA Temperature Reset, four variables must be configured. Cooling Reset Type (Cooling Reset Select, CRST) must be enabled. The milliamp signal at which no temperature reset is required, Current No Reset Value (Current No Reset Va lu e, CRV1), must be set. The milliamp signal at which full temperature reset is required, Current Full Reset Value (Cur- rent Full Reset Value, CRV2), must be set. Finally, the amount of temperature reset desired, Degrees Cool Reset (Cooling Reset Deg. Value, DRGC), must be set.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other control systems due to possible power supply differences such as a full wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connection of control devices with different power supplies may result in permanent damage. The ComfortLink™ controls incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Cooling Reset Select

Current No Reset Value

Current Full Reset Value

Cooling Reset Deg. Value

Main Menu

Config USER

Main Menu

Setpoint SETPOINT

Main Menu

Setpoint SETPOINT

Main Menu

Setpoint SETPOINT

To configure this option with the Navigator™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

Cooling Reset

CRST

CRV1

CRV2

DGRC

Ty pe

Current No Reset Temp

Current Full Reset Temp

Degrees Cool Reset

Configuration RSET

Setpoints COOL Default = 0.0

In the example in Fig. 23, at 4 mA no reset takes place and at 20 mA, 5° F (2.8° C) chilled water set point reset is required.

Default =0 (No Reset)

3 (4-20mA Control)

9 Default = 0.0

10 Default = 0.0

Default =

0.0 F (0.0 C)

Default = No Reset 4-20mA Input

Page 37

100908070605040

302010

% Load

Fluid Temperature (deg F)

EWT

LWT

Design

Rise

(typical)

Fig. 20 — Return Water Temperature Control Load Profile

a30-4478

Fig. 19 — Leaving Chilled Water Temperature Control

a30-4066

Fluid Temperature (deg F)

302010

EWT

Design

Rise

(typical)

LWT

100908070605040

Load%

Page 38

Entering-Leaving Water Temperature (deg F)

Degrees Reset (deg F)

Cooling

Reset

Deg. Value,

DGRC

Delta T No Reset Temp,

CRT1

Delta T Full Reset Temp,

CRT2

6 8

Fig. 21 — Return Water Reset

a30-4479

Fig. 22 — Space Temperature Reset

a30-4481

Cooling Reset

Deg. Value,

Degrees Reset (deg F)

DGRC

60 65 70 75 80

Space T Full Reset Value,

CRS2

Space Temperature (deg F)

Space T No Reset Value,

CRS1

Page 39

Fig. 23 — 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset

0101420

mA Signal

Degrees Reset (deg F)

Cooling Reset

Deg. Value,

DGRC

Current No Reset Value,

CRV1

Current Full Reset Value,

CRV2

46 8

12 16 18

a30-4482

Demand Limit — Demand limit is a feature that allows

the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy usage. This allows the owner to keep energy costs down. There are three types of demand limiting that can be configured. The first type is through 2-step switch control, which will reduce the maximum capacity to 2 user configurable percentages. The second type is by 4 to 20 mA signal input which will reduce the maximum capacity linearly between 100% at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down to the user-configurable level at a 20 mA input signal. The third type uses the CCN Loadshed module and has the ability to limit the current operating capacity to maximum and further reduce the capacity if required. Demand limit control can be based on a calculated capacity level or by compressor current level.

NOTE: If using the compressor current level for demand limit, take into account the other power draws such as the condenserfan motors when determining the limit value desired.

SWITCH CONTROLLED DEMAND LIMIT — The control system is capable of demand limit based on a field-supplied switch for 1-step demand limit or 2 switches for 2-step demand limit. One-step demand limit is standard. The 2-step switch control of demand limiting requires the Energy Management Module (EMM). Demand limit steps are controlled by two relay switch inputs field wired to TB5-5 and TB5-14 for Switch 1 and TB6-14 and TB6-15 for Switch 2.

For demand limit by switch control, closing the first demand limit contact will put the unit on the first demand limit level, either by capacity or compressor current. The unit will not exceed the percentage of capacity or compressor current entered as Demand Limit Switch 1 set point. Closing contacts on the second demand limit switch prevents the unit from exceeding the demand limit entered as Demand Limit Switch 2 set point. The demand limit percent capacity or compressor current that is set to the lowest demand takes priority if both demand limit inputs are closed. If the demand limit percentage does not match unit operation, the unit will limit capacity or current to the closest step without exceeding the value.

To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to use by configuring the Demand Limit Select variable (De- mand Limit Type Select, DMDC) to Switch. Configure the Demand Limit set points based on the type selected.

Switch Controlled (Capacity Based) mand limit control, an energy management module must be installed. One-step demand limit control does not require the energy management module. To configure Demand Limit for switch control, three parameters for 1-step switch control must be configured. For 2-step control, four parameters must be configured. The parameters are: the type of Demand Limit Selection (Demand Limit Type Select, DMDC), the setting for Switch Limit Set Point 1 (Switch Limit Setpoint 1, DLS1), The setting for Switch Limit Set Point 2 (Switch Limit Set-

point 2, DLS2), and Current Limit Select (Current Limit Select, CUR.S). Current Limit Select must be set to NO.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Demand Limit Typ e S ele ct

Switch Limit Setpoint 1

Switch Limit Setpoint 2

Current Limit Select

To configure this option with the Navigator™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

Demand Limit

DMDC

Select Switch Limit

DLS1

Setpoint 1

Switch Limit

DLS2

Setpoint 2

Current Limit

CUR.S

Select

— If using 2-step de-

Config USER 24

Setpoints SETPOINT 33 Default = 100%

Setpoints SETPOINT 34

Config USER 30

Configuration RSET

Setpoints MISC Default = 100%

Setpoints MISC

Configuration OPTN

1 (Switch Control) Default = 0 (None)

(Not required for 1-Step) Default = 100%

No Default = No

SWITCH Default = NONE

(Not required for 1-Step) Default = 100%

NO Default: NO

Page 40

In the following example, 2-step demand limit based on capacity is desired with the first switch closure limiting the capacity to 60%. The second switch closure is to limit the capacity to 40%. Demand Limit Switch 1 is 60% and Demand Limit Switch 2 is 40%.

TOUCH PILOT DISPLAY NAVIGATOR DISPLAY

Display Name Value Item Value Demand Limit Type Select 1 DMDC SWITCH Switch Limit Setpoint 1 60% DSL1 60% Switch Limit Setpoint 2 40% DSL2 40% Current Limit Select No CUR.S NO

Switch Controlled (Current Based)

— If using 2-step demand limit control, an energy management module must be installed. One-step demand limit control does not require the energy management module. Four parameters for 1-step switch control must be configured. For 2-step control, five parameters must be configured. The parameters are: the type of Demand Limit Selection (Demand Limit Type Select, DMDC), the setting for Switch Limit Set Point 1 (Switch Limit Setpoint 1,

DLS1), the setting for Switch Limit Set Point 2 (Switch Limit Setpoint 2, DLS2), the Current Limit Select (Current Limit Select, CUR.S), and the Compressor Current limit at 100%

signal, (Current Limit at 100%, CUR.F).

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH

Demand Limit Typ e S ele ct

Switch Limit Setpoint 1

Switch Limit Setpoint 2

Current Limit Select

Current Limit at 100%

Config USER 24

Setpoints SETPOINT 33 Default = 100%

Setpoints SETPOINT 34

Config USER 30

Config USER 31

LINE

NO.

1 (Switch Control) Default = 0 (None)

(Not required for 1-Step) Default = 100%

Ye s Default = No

Default =

2000.0 Amps

VAL UE

To configure this option with the Navigator™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

DMDC

DSL1

DSL2

CUR.S

CUR.F

Demand Limit Select

Switch Limit Setpoint 1

Switch Limit Setpoint 2

Current Limit Select

Current Limit at 100%

Configuration RSET

Setpoints MISC

Configuration OPTN

SWITCH Default = NONE

Default = 100%

(Not required for 1-Step) Default = 100%

NO Default: NO

Default = 2000

EXTERNALLY POWERED (4 to 20 mA) CAPACITY BASED DEMAND LIMIT — The energy management module is required for 4 to 20 mA demand limit control. An externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal must be connected to TB6-1 and TB6-2. To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA control based on unit capacity, four parameters must be configured. The parameters are: the type of Demand Limit Selection (Demand Limit Type Select, DMDC), the current at which 100% capacity limit takes place (mA For 100% Demand Limit, DMMX), the current at which 0% capacity limit takes place (mA For 0% Demand Limit, DMZE), and the Current Limit Selection (Current Limit Select, CUR.S).

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other control systems due to possible power supply differences such as a full wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connection of control devices with different power supplies may result in permanent damage. ComfortLink™ controls incorporate power supplies with half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be utilized if the signal generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Demand Limit Type Select

mA For 100% Demand Limit

mA For 0% Demand Limit

Current Limit Select

Config USER 24

Config USER 28 Default = 0.0 mA

Config USER 29 Default = 10.0 mA

Config USER 30

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

Demand Limit

DMDC

DMMX

DMZE

CUR.S

Select mA for 100%

Demand Lim mA for 0%

Demand Limit Current Limit

Select

Configuration RSET

Configuration OPTN

In the following example, a 4 mA signal is Demand Limit 100% and a 20 mA Demand Limit signal is 0%. The 4 to 20 mA signal is connected to TB6-1 and TB6-2. The demand limit is a linear interpolation between the two values entered. In Fig. 24, if the machine receives a 12 mA signal, the machine controls will limit the capacity to 50%.

EXTERNALLY POWERED (4 to 20 mA) CURRENT BASED DEMAND LIMIT — The energy management module is required for 4 to 20 mA demand limit control. An externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal must be connected to TB6-1 and TB6-2. To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA control based on compressor current, five parameters must be configured. The parameters are: the type of Demand Limit Selection (Demand Limit Type Select, DMDC), the current at which 100% capacity limit takes place (mA For 100% Demand Limit, DMMX), the current at which 0% capacity limit takes place (mA For 0% Demand Limit, DMZE), the Current Limit Selection (Current Limit Select, CUR.S), and the Compressor Current limit at 100% signal (Current Limit at 100%, CUR.F).

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Demand Limit Type Select

mA For 100% Demand Limit

mA For 0% Demand Limit

Current Limit Select

Current Limit at 100%

Config USER 24

Config USER 28 Default = 0.0 mA

Config USER 29 Default = 10.0 mA

Config USER 30

Config USER 31 Default = 2000.0 Amps

2 (4-20mA Control) Default = 0 (None)

No Default = No

4-20MA INPUT Default = NONE

Default =

0.0 mA Default =

10.0 mA NO

Default: NO

2 (4-20mA Control) Default = 0 (None)

Ye s Default = No

Page 41

100

Fig. 24 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit (Capacity)

a30-4831

% Demand Limit

mA For 100% Demand Limit,

8 10

mA Demand Limit Signal

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

Demand Limit

DMDC

DMMX

DMZE

CUR.S

CUR.F

Select

mA for 100% Demand Lim

mA for 0% Demand Limit

Current Limit Select

Current Limit at 100%

Configuration RSET

Configuration OPTN

4-20MA INPUT Default = NONE

Default =

0.0 mA Default =

10.0 mA YES

Default: NO Default =

2000

In the following example, a 4 mA signal is Demand Limit for compressor current is 2000 amps and a 20 mA Demand Limit signal corresponds with a compressor current of 0 amps. The 4 to 20 mA signal is connected to TB6-1 and TB6-2. The demand limit is a linear interpolation between the two values entered. If the machine receives a 12 mA signal, the machine controls will limit the total compressor current capacity to 1000 amps. See Fig. 25.

CCN LOADSHED CONTROLLED DEMAND LIMIT — To configure Demand Limit for CCN Loadshed control, the unit Operating Type Control must be in CCN control. With the Touch Pilot™ display, the machine must be started with CCN Control. For the Navigator™ display, the Operating Control Type (I/O Button, OPER) must be CCN CONTROL.

The unit must be controlled by a Chillervisor module. The Chillervisor module can force the demand limit variable and directly control the capacity of the machine. Additionally, the unit’s set point will be artificially lowered to force the chiller to load to the demand limit value.

Ice Storage Operation — Chiller operation can be

configured to make and store ice. The energy management module and an Ice Done Switch are required for operation in the Ice Mode. In this configuration, the machine can operate with up to three cooling set points: Cooling Set Point 1 (Cool- ing Setpoint 1, CSP.1) is used during the Occupied period; Cooling Set Point 2 (Cooling Setpoint 2, CSP.2) is used dur- ing the Unoccupied period when the ice build is complete (Ice Done Switch is closed); and Cooling Ice Set Point (Cooling

DMMX

mA For 0% Demand Limit,

12 14 16 18

DMZE

Ice Setpoint, CSP.3) is used during the unoccupied period while ice is building (Ice Done Switch is open).

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Ice Mode Enable Config USER 42 Yes

To configure this option with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

ICE.M Ice Mode Enable Configuration OPTN ENBL

A power cycle is required for the values to take effect.

Broadcast Configuration — The 30XW chiller is ca-

pable of broadcasting time, date, and holiday status to all elements in the CCN system. In the stand-alone mode, broadcast must be activated to utilize holiday schedules and adjust for daylight saving time. If the chiller is to be connected to a CCN system, determine which system element is to be the network broadcaster to all other system elements. Broadcast is activated and deactivated in the BRODEFS Table. It is accessible from Touch Pilot display (Config BRODEFS) or through Network Service Tool. It is not accessible through Navigator display.

Only one element should be configured as a broadcaster. If a broadcast is activated by a device that has been designated as a network broadcaster, then broadcasted time, date, and holiday status will be updated over the CCN system. If broadcast is enabled, a broadcast acknowledger must also be enabled. The acknowledger cannot be the same machine as the broadcasting machine.

ACTIVATE — The Activate variable enables the broadcast function of the ComfortLink controls. If this variable is set to 0, this function is not used and holiday schedules and daylight savings compensation are not possible. Setting this variable to 1 allows the machine to broadcast and receive broadcasts on the network. The following information is broadcast: the time with compensation for daylight savings, date, and holiday flag.

Page 42

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

mA Signal

Compressor Current

mA For 100% Demand Limit,

DMMX

mA For 0% Demand Limit,

DMZE

24 6

10 12

16 18 20

Fig. 25 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit (Compressor Current)

a30-4832

Set this variable to 2 for stand-alone units that are not connected to a CCN. With this configuration, daylight saving time and holiday determination will be done without broadcasting through the bus. This variable can only be changed when using the Touch Pilot display, ComfortVIEW™ software, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Navigator display.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Activate Config BRODEFS 1

Range = 0 to 2 Default = 2

BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER — This configuration defines if the chiller will be used to acknowledge broadcast messages on the CCN bus. One broadcast acknowledger is required per bus, including secondary buses created by the use of a bridge. This variable can only be changed with the Touch Pilot display, ComfortVIEW software, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Navigator display.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Broadcast acknowledger Config Ctlt-ID 10 Yes

Alarm Control

ALARM ROUTING CONTROL — Alarms recorded on the chiller can be routed through the CCN. To configure this option, the ComfortLink control must be configured to determine which CCN elements will receive and process alarms. Input for the decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to either 0 or 1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be sent to the system element that corresponds to that digit. Setting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing. The factory default is 00000000. See Fig. 26. The default setting is is based on the assumption that the unit will not be connected to a network. If the network does not contain a ComfortVIEW, ComfortWORKS abling this feature will only add unnecessary activity to the CCN communication bus.

This option can be modified by the Touch Pilot display. It cannot be modified with the Navigator display.

, TeLink, DataLINK™, or BAClink module, en-

Typical configuration of the Alarm Routing variable is

11010000. This Alarm Routing status will transmit alarms to ComfortVIEW software, TeLink, BAClink, and DataLINK.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Alarm Routing Control

Config ALARMDEF 1 Default = 00000000

ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY — The ComfortVIEW device uses the equipment priority value when sorting alarms by level. The purpose of the equipment priority value is to determine the order in which to sort alarms that have the same level. A priority of 0 is the highest and would appear first when sorted. A priority of 7 would appear last when sorted. For example, if two chillers send out identical alarms, the chiller with the higher priority would be listed first. The default is 4. This variable can only be changed when using the Touch Pilot display, ComfortVIEW software, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Navigator™ display. To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Alarm Equipment Priority

Config ALARMDEF 2

Range = 0 to 7 Default = 4

COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME — This variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to elapse between alarm retries. Retries occur when an alarm is not acknowledged by a network alarm acknowledger, which may be either a ComfortVIEW software or TeLink. If acknowledgement is not received, the alarm will be re-transmitted after the number of minutes specified in this decision. This variable can only be changed with the Touch Pilot display, ComfortVIEW, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Navigator display. To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Comm Failure Retry Time

Config ALARMDEF 3

Range = 1 to 240 minutes Default = 10 minutes

Page 43

RE-ALARM TIME — This variable specifies the amount of

DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT

Alarm Routing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALRM_CNT

ComfortView™, or ComfortWorks

TeLink

Unused

BacLink or DataLink™

Unused

Fig. 26 — Alarm Routing Control

a30-4485

time that will be allowed to elapse between re-alarms. A realarm occurs when the conditions that caused the initial alarm continue to persist for the number of minutes specified in this decision. Re-alarming will continue to occur at the specified interval until the condition causing the alarm is corrected. This variable can only be changed with the Touch Pilot display, ComfortVIEW, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Navigator display. To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY

NAME

Realarm Time

PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Config ALARMDEF 4

Range = 1 to 254 minutes 255 = Re-Alarm Disabled Default = 30 minutes

ALARM SYSTEM NAME — This variable specifies the system element name that will appear in the alarms generated by the unit control. The name can be up to 8 alphanumeric characters in length. This variable can only be changed when using the Touch Pilot display, ComfortVIEW, or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with the Navigator display.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Alarm System Name

Config ALARMDEF 5

Default = PRO_XAXQ

Daylight Saving Time Configuration — The

30XW chiller control contains software which can automatically correct for daylight saving time. This software is accessible from the Touch Pilot display, ComfortVIEW, or Network Service Tool. It is not accessible through the Navigator display.

To enable this feature, Daylight Saving Select must be set to

1. The start of Daylight Saving must be configured by setting the Month, Day of Week, and Week of Month. The end for Daylight Saving must also be configured. To configure this option with the Touch Pilot display, see Table 32.

Table 32 — Daylight Savings Time Configuration

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Activate Config BRODEFS 1

Daylight Saving Select

Entering Config BRODEFS 8

Month Config BRODEFS 9

Day of Week (1=Monday)

Week of Month Config BRODEFS 11

Leaving Config BRODEFS 12

Month Config BRODEFS 13

Day of Week (1=Monday)

Week of Month Config BRODEFS 15

Config BRODEFS 7

Config BRODEFS 10

Config BRODEFS 14

1 or 2 Default = 2

Enable Default = Dsble

Enter Starting Month for Daylight Saving

Enter the Day of the Week Daylight Saving Starts

Enter Week of the Month Daylight Saving Starts

Enter Ending Month for Daylight Saving

Enter the Day of the Week Daylight Saving ends

Enter Week of the Month Daylight Saving ends

Capacity Control Overrides — The following ca-

pacity control overrides (Active Capacity Override, CAP.S) will modify the normal operation routine. If any of the override conditions listed below are satisfied, the override will determine the capacity change instead of the normal control. Overrides are listed by priority order and are often linked to unit operating modes. See Table 33 for a list of overrides. See the Operating Modes section on page 54 for more information regarding operating modes.

Override #1: Cooler Freeze Protection tempts to avoid the freeze protection alarm. If the Leaving Water Temperature is less than Brine Freeze Set Point (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP) + 2.0° F (1.1º C) then a stage of capacity is removed.

NOTE: The freeze set point is 34 F (1.1 C) for fresh water systems (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD=1). The freeze set point is Brine Freeze Set Point (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine systems (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD=2).

— This override at-

Page 44

Override #2: Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling Override #3: Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling

These overrides attempt to avoid the low suction temperature alarms and are active only when the compressor is running beyond the fully unloaded level. The slide valve in the affected circuit will be decreased in position if the Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Brine Freeze Set Point (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP) –18.0 F (–10 C) for 90 seconds, or the Satu- rated Suction Temperature is less than –4 F (–20 C).

Override #5: Low Temperature Cooling and High Temperature Heating — This override decreases capacity when the difference between the Control Point (Control Point, CTPT) and the Leaving Water Temperature (Cooler Leaving Fluid, LWT) reaches a predetermined limit and the rate of change of the water is 0º F per minute or still decreasing.

Override #6: Low Temperature Cooling and High Temperature Heating — This override decreases capacity (approximately 5% of circuit capacity) when the Entering Water Temperature (Cooler Entering Fluid, EWT) is less than the Control Point (Control Point, CTPT).

Override #7: Ramp Loading

— No capacity stage increase will be made if the unit is configured for ramp loading (Ramp Loading Select, RL.S=ENBL) and the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature and the Control Point is greater than 4º F (2.2º C) and the rate of change of the leaving water is greater than Cool Ramp Loading Rate (Cooling Ramp Load- ing, CRMP). Operating mode 5 (MD05) will be in effect.

Override #8: Service Manual Test Override

— This override mode indicates the unit has been placed into Service Test mode. The user can then use Service Test functions to test the unit. All safeties and higher priority overrides are monitored and acted upon.

NOTE: The user cannot activate this override mode. Override # 9: Demand Limit

— This override mode is active when a command to limit the capacity is received. If the current unit capacity is greater than the active capacity limit value, a stage is removed. If the current capacity is lower than the capacity limit value, the control will not add a stage that will result in the new capacity being greater then the capacity limit value. Operating mode 4 (MD04) will be in effect.

Override #10: Cooler Interlock Override

— This override prohibits compressor operation until the Cooler Interlock (Cooler Flow Switch, LOCK) is closed.

Override #11: High Temperature Cooling and Low Temperature Heating — This override algorithm runs once when the unit is switched to ON. If the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature (Cooler Leaving Fluid, LWT) and the Control Point (Control Point, CTPT) exceeds a calculated value and the rate of change of the water temperature is greater than –0.1º F/min, a stage will be added.

Override #12: High Temperature Cooling and Low Temperature Heating — This override runs only when Minimum Load Control is Enabled, (Hot Gas Bypass Select, HGBP) and is set to 1, 2 or 3. This override will add a stage of capacity if the next stage is Minimum Load Control, when the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature (Cooler Leav- ing Fluid, LWT) and the Control Point (Control Point, CTPT) exceeds a calculated value and the rate of change of the water temperature is greater than a fixed value.

Override #13: Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time Delay

— Whenever a capacity change has been made, the control will remain at this capacity stage for the next 90 seconds. During this time, no capacity control algorithm calculations will be made. If the capacity step is a compressor, an additional 90-second delay is added to the previous hold time (see Override #22). This override allows the system to stabilize before

another capacity stage is added or removed. If a condition of a higher priority override occurs, the higher priority override will take precedence. Operating Mode 10 (MD10) will be in effect.

Table 33 — Capacity Control Overrides

1 Cooler Freeze Protection 2 Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling 3 Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling 4 — 5 Low Temperature cooling and High Temperature Heating (LWT) 6 Low Temperature cooling and High Temperature Heating (EWT) 7 Ramp Loading 8 Service Manual Test Override

9 Demand Limit 10 Cooler Interlock Override 11 High Temperature Cooling and Low Temperature Heating 12 High Temperature Cooling and Low Temperature Heating

(minimum load control in effect)

13 Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time Delay 14 Slow Change Override 15 System Manager Capacity Control 16 Circuit A High Pressure Override 17 Circuit B High Pressure Override 18 — 19 Standby Mode 20 — 21 — 22 Minimum On Time Delay 23 Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling 24 Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling 25 — 26 — 27 — 28 — 29 — 30 — 31 — 32 — 33 — 34 Circuit A Low Refrigerant Charge 35 Circuit B Low Refrigerant Charge 36 — 37 — 38 — 39 — 40 — 41 Circuit A High Current Override 42 Circuit B High Current Override 43 — 44 Circuit A High Suction Superheat at Part Load 45 Circuit B High Suction Superheat at Part Load 46 — 47 — 48 — 49 —

—

50 51 — 52 — 53 Circuit A Delay for Unloading the Slide Valve 54 Circuit B Delay for Unloading the Slide Valve 55 — 56 — 57 — 58 — 59 Circuit A Low Oil Level 60 Circuit B Low Oil Level 61 — 62 Circuit A High Motor Temperature Override 63 Circuit B High Motor Temperature Override 64 — 65 — 66 Circuit A High Discharge Gas Override 67 Circuit B High Discharge Gas Override

CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES

Page 45

Override #14: Slow Change Override vents compressor stage changes when the leaving temperature is close to the control point and slowly moving towards it.

Override #15: System Manager Capacity Control Chillervisor module is controlling the unit and multiple chillers, the unit will increase capacity to attempt to load to the demand limited value.

Override #16: Circuit A High Pressure Override Override #17: Circuit B High Pressure Override — This override attempts to avoid a high pressure failure. The algorithm is run every 4 seconds. If the Saturated Condensing Temperature for the circuit is above the High Pressure Threshold (High Pressure Threshold, HP.TH) then the position of slide valve will be unloaded.

Override #19: Standby Mode not allow a compressor to run if the unit is in Standby mode, (Heat/Cool Status, HC.ST=2).

Override #22: Minimum On Time Delay Override #13 Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time Delay, for compressor capacity changes, an additional 90-second delay will be added to Override #13 delay. No compressor will be deenergized until 3 minutes have elapsed since the last compressor has been turned ON. When this override is active, the capacity control algorithm calculations will be performed, but no capacity reduction will be made until the timer has expired. A control with higher precedence will override the Minimum On Time Delay.

Override #23: Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling Override #24: Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature in Cooling — If the circuit is operating close to the operational limit of the compressor, the circuit capacity will remain at the same point or unload to raise the saturated suction temperature. This algorithm will be active if at least 1 compressor in the circuit is on and one of the following conditions is true:

1. Saturated Suction Temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Setpoint (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP) –6º F (3.3º C).

2. Saturated Suction Temperature is less than the Brine Freeze Setpoint (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP) and the circuit approach (Leaving Water Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) is greater than 15º F (8.3º C) and the Circuit Superheat (Discharge Gas Temperature – Saturated Discharge Temperature) is greater than 25º F (13.9º C).

If any of these conditions are met, the appropriate operating

mode, 21 (Circuit A) or 22 (Circuit B) will be in effect. Override #34: Circuit A Low Refrigerant Charge

Override #35: Circuit B Low Refrigerant Charge — The capacity override attempts to protect the compressor from starting with no refrigerant in the circuit. This algorithm runs only when the circuit is not operational (compressors is OFF). There are several criteria that will enable this override:

1. The saturated suction temperature or saturated discharge temperature is less than –13 F (–25 C).

2. All of these conditions must be true: a. The saturated suction temperature or saturated

discharge temperature is less than leaving fluid temperature by more than 5.4º F (3.0º C).

b. Saturated suction temperature or saturated dis-

charge temperature is less than 41 F (5 C).

— This override algorithm will

— This override pre-

— If a

— In addition to

c. Outdoor air temperature is less than 32 F (0º C). d. Saturated suction temperature or saturated discharge

temperature is less than the outdoor air temperature by more than 5.4º F (3.0º C).

3. All of these conditions must be true: a. The saturated suction temperature or saturated

discharge temperature is less than leaving fluid temperature by more than 5.4º F (3.0º C).

b. Saturated suction temperature or saturated dis-

charge temperature is less than 41 F (5 C).

c. Saturated suction temperature or saturated dis-

charge temperature is less than the brine freeze point (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP) by more than 6º F (3.3º C).

NOTE: The freeze set point is 34 F (1.1 C) for fresh water systems (Brine Freeze Setpoint, FLUD=1). The freeze set point is brine freeze set point (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP), for medium temperature brine systems (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD=2).

4. All of these conditions must be true: a. The saturated suction temperature or saturated

discharge temperature is less than leaving water temperature by more than 5.4º F (3.0º C).

b. Saturated suction temperature or saturated discharge

temperature is less than 41 F (5 C).

c. Saturated suction temperature or saturated discharge

temperature is less than the outdoor-air temperature by more than 9º F (5º C).

If any of these conditions 1, 2, 3 or 4 are met, the appropriate operating mode, 21 (Circuit A) or 22 (Circuit B) will be in effect.

Override #41: Circuit A High Current Override Override #42: Circuit B High Current Override — This override attempts to avoid an overcurrent failure. The algorithm is run every 4 seconds. If the compressor current is greater than 79% of must trip amps (MTA) but less than 85% MTA then the capacity will be held at current capacity. If the compressor current is greater than 85% MTA then capacity will be reduced by repositioning the slide valve until the current is less than 85% MTA (Must Trip Amps, MTA.X).

Override #44: Circuit A High Suction Superheat at Part Load Override #45: Circuit B High Suction Superheat at Part Load — If the compressor of the circuit is on, the compressor current is no more than 30% of the MTA, main EXV is more than 90% open and the suction superheat is higher than the superheat control point for more than 5 minutes, then the circuit will be shut down.

Override #53: Circuit A Delay for Unloading the Slide Va lv e Override #54: Circuit B Delay for Unloading the Slide Va lv e — This override prevents the compressor from re-starting with locked rotor failure after being shutdown due to an alarm or power cycle. The delay varies depending on the size of the compressor. Refer to Table 34 for compressor nominal capacities. A delay of 20 minutes will elapse for 182 and 204 ton compressors. The delay allows the slide valve of the compressor to move back to its fully unloaded position. The delay is adjusted according to the percent of the compressor running capacity before it is shut down. If the compressor is stopped normally, no delay will be applied. If the compressor is shut down by the locked rotor alarm, a full delay will be applied before the compressor is allowed to re-start.

Page 46

Table 34 — 30XW Compressor Nominal Capacity

30XW UNIT SIZE 150 175 200 325 350 400

Compressor Nominal Capacity (tons)

Circuit A 182 182 204 182 182 204 Circuit B — — — 182 182 204

Override #59: Circuit A Low Oil Level Override #60: Circuit B Low Oil Level — This override is only effective when the circuit is not running. The override will prevent the circuit from starting up with a low oil level. If this override occurs three times, the low oil level alarm will be tripped.

Override #62: Circuit A High Motor Temperature Override Override #63: Circuit B High Motor Temperature Override — This override prevents the compressor motor temperature

from rising above the high temperature limit, but still allows the chiller to run close to the high temperature limit by unloading the compressor. If the motor temperature is greater than 214 F (101.1 C), the compressor will not load. This override will remain active until the temperature drops below 214 F (101.1 C). If the motor temperature is greater than 225 F (107.2 C) for 60 seconds, the circuit capacity will decrease by one stage. If the motor temperature is greater than 228 F (108.9), the circuit capacity will decrease by one stage immediately.

Override #66: Circuit A High Discharge Gas Override Override #67: Circuit B High Discharge Gas Override — When the temperature is above the limit minus 2° F (1.1° C) increase in capacity will not be allowed. This override will remain active until the discharge gas temperature drops below the limit by –3° F (–1.7° C).

Head Pressure Control — The Main Base Board

(MBB) uses the saturated condensing temperature input from the discharge pressure transducer to control the head pressure control signal. Head pressure control is maintained through a calculated set point which is automatically adjusted based on actual saturated condensing and saturated suction temperatures so that the compressor(s) is (are) always operating within the manufacturer’s specified envelope. The control will automatically reduce the unit capacity as the saturated condensing temperature approaches an upper limit. See capacity overrides #16-18. The control will indicate through an operating mode that high ambient unloading is in effect. If the saturated condensing temperature in a circuit exceeds the calculated maximum, the circuit will be stopped. For these reasons, there are no head pressure control methods or set points to enter. The control will modulate the 0 to 10v head pressure control output signal when condensing temperature is below the minimum head pressure requirement for the compressor. See Table 34 for compressor nominal capacity.

LOW CONDENSER FLUID TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE CONTROL OPTION — Units will start and operate down to 65 F (18.3 C) entering condenser water temperature as standard. Operation with entering condenser water temperatures below 65 F (18.3 C) requires a field supplied and installed condenser fluid control valve.

Sequence of Operation through a 0 to 10 vdc signal provided by the MLV/COND board, channel 9, to maintain the head pressure set point. Unit sizes 325-400 use a common condenser so the MBB uses the highest saturated condensing temperature of either circuit. As a safety feature, if the circuit is on and if the saturated condensing temperature reaches the condensing set point +10° F, the valve is opened to its maximum position to avoid a high pressure alarm. The water valve is fully closed when the circuit is OFF on unit sizes 150-200 and if both circuits are off on unit sizes 325-400.

If the unit is configured as a heat machine, the valve will be

maintained fully open when the unit operates in heating mode

— Valve position is controlled

and when the condenser leaving water temperature becomes greater than the head pressure set point.

Maximum and minimum condenser valve position is configurable. The minimum condenser valve position is very important to avoid condenser freeze risks as condenser freeze protection is ensured by the condenser pump.

To configure this option with the Touch Pilot™ display:

DISPLAY NAME PATH LINE NO. VALUE

Condenser Water Val Se l

Water Val Condensing Stp

Recl Valve Min Posi tion

Recl Valve Max Posi tion

Prop PID Gain Varif an

Int PID Gain Varif an

Deri PID Gain Varif an

Service FACTORY 13 YES

Setpoint 38

Service SERVICE1 19

Service SERVICE1 20

Service SERVICE1 6

Service SERVICE1 7

Service SERVICE1 8

Range: 80 to120 F (26.7 to 48.9 C) Default: 86 F (30 C)

Range: 0 to 50% Default: 20%

Range: 20 to 100% Default: 100%

Range: -20 to 20 Default: 2.0

Range: -5.0 to 5.0 Default: 0.2

Range: -20 to 20 Default: 0.4

To configure this option with the Navigator™ display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE

Condenser Valve

CON.V

Select

W.S CT Water Val Cond Stp Setpoint MISC

Reclaim Water Valve

HR.MI

Min Reclaim Water Valve

HR.MA

Max Varifan Proportion

HD.PG

Gain Var ifa n D e rivat ive

HD.DG

Gain

HD.IG Varifan Integral Gain Configuration SERV

Configuration UNIT YES

Range: 80 to140 F (26.7 to 60 C) Default: 86 F (30 C)

Configuration SERV

Range: 0 to 50% Default: 20%

Range: 20 to 100% Default: 100%

Range: –10 to 10 Default: 2.0

Range: –10 to 10 Default: 0.4

Range: –10 to 10 Default: 0.2

NOTE: Operation of the head pressure control valve can be verified by entering Quick Test. From the Navigator display, go to Service Test\QUIC\FAN.A. From the Touch Pilot display, go to MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1\Q_VFANA.

PRE-START-UP

IMPORTANT: Complete the Start-Up Checklist for 30XW Liquid Chillers at the end of this publication.

The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit, and provides a record of unit condition, application requirements, system information, and operation at initial start-up.

Do not attempt to start the chiller until the following checks have been completed.

System Check

1. Check to ensure the unit is level per the installation instructions.

2. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.

3. Check that auxiliary components, such as the chilled fluid and condenser fluid circulating pumps, air-handling equipment, or any other equipment to which the chiller supplies liquid are operational. Consult manufacturer's instructions. If the unit has field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly installed and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring diagrams.

4. Open compressor suction service valves (if equipped).

5. Open discharge, liquid line, oil line, and economizer (if equipped) service valves.

Page 47

6. Fill the chiller fluid circuit with clean water (with recommended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to be cooled. Bleed all air out of high points of system. If unit is exposed to temperatures below 32 F (0° C), sufficient inhibited propylene glycol or other suitable corrosion inhibited antifreeze should be added to the chiller water and condenser water circuit to prevent possible freeze-up. The chilled water loop must be cleaned before the unit is connected. To set the maintenance time for cleaning and inspecting loop strainers, go to Water Filter Ctrl (days), W.F IL . Values for this item are counted as days. Refer to the system pump package literature for specific internal inspection/cleaning requirements.

7. Check tightness of all electrical connections.

8. Verify power supply phase sequence. The phase sequence should be A-B-C for proper compressor rotation.

START-UP

CAUTION

Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the machine may result.

Actual Start-Up —

Actual start-up should be done only

under supervision of a qualified refrigeration technician.

1. Be sure all discharge, oil, and suction valves (if equipped) and liquid line service valves are open.

2. Using the unit control, set leaving-fluid set point (Cool- ing Setpoint 1, CSP.1). No cooling range adjustment is necessary.

3. If optional control functions or accessories are being used, the unit must be properly configured. Refer to Configuration Options section for details.

4. Start the chilled fluid and condenser pumps, if unit is not configured for pump control. (Cooler Pumps Sequence, PUMP=0; Condenser Pump Sequence, HPUM = No)

5. Complete the Start-Up Checklist to verify all components are operating properly.

6. Check the cooler flow switch for proper operation. Ensure that the flow switch input indicates closed when the pump is on and open when the pump is off.

7. Turn Enable/Off/Remote contact switch to Enable position.

8. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is functioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid temperature agrees with leaving set point Control Point (Control Point, CTPT).

Operating Limitations

TEMPERATURES — Unit operating temperature limits are listed in Table 35.

Low Condenser Water Temperature Operation

— For condenser entering water temperatures between 33 F (0.6 C) and 65 F (18.3 F), field installed accessory head pressure control valve is required. Contact your Carrier representative for details.

CAUTION

Table 35 — Temperature Limits for Standard Units

TEMPERATURE F C Maximum Condenser EWT 110 43.3 Minimum Condenser EWT 65 18.3 Maximum Condenser LWT* 118 47.8 Maximum Cooler EWT† 70 21.1 Maximum Cooler LWT 60 15.6 Minimum Cooler LWT** 40 4.4

LEGEND

EWT — Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature

*Temperature limit for high condensing/heat reclaim option units are

140 F (60 C).

†For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85 F (29.4 C).

**Unit requires brine modification for operation below this

temperature.

VOLTAGE Main Power Supply — Minimum and maximum acceptable

supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions. Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a motor

where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than 2%.

To determine percent voltage imbalance:

max voltage deviation from

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

avg voltage

average voltage

The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average across all 3 legs.

Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.

AB = 243v

BC = 236v

AC = 238v

1. Determine average voltage:

Average voltage =

243+236+238

717

= 239

2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage: (AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v

(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v (AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v

Maximum deviation is 4 v.

3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

239

= 1.7%

This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the maximum allowable of 2%.

IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is more than 2%, contact the local electric utility company immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance condition is corrected.

MINIMUM FLUID LOOP VOLUME — To obtain proper temperature control, loop fluid volume must be at least 3 gallons per ton (3.25 L per kW) of chiller nominal capacity for air conditioning and at least 6 gallons per ton (6.5 L per kW) for

Page 48

process applications. Refer to application information in Prod-

Fig. 27 — 30XW150-200 Evaporator Marine Waterbox

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

(0)

(14.9)

(29.8)

(44.8)

(59.7)

(74.6)

(89.5)

(104.4)

(119.4)

ft wg(kPa)

0 500 1000 1500 2000 gpm (0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (L/s)

Evaporator Flow Rate

Pressure Drop

3 pass

2 pass

1 pass

a30-4833

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

uct Data literature for details. FLOW RATE REQUIREMENTS — Standard chillers should

be applied with nominal flow rates within those listed in the Evaporator and Condenser Flow Rates table. Higher or lower flow rates are permissible to obtain lower or higher temperature rises. Minimum flow rates must be exceeded to assure turbulent flow and proper heat transfer in the cooler. See Table

36. See Fig. 27-37 for cooler pressure drop curves.

Table 36 — Evaporator and Condenser Flow Rates

EVAPORATOR CONDENSER NOMINAL

Leaving Fluid/Entering Fluid Leaving Fluid/Entering Fluid

Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum*

30XW UNIT

Two pass 200 12.6 720 45.4 240 15.1 960 60.6 384 24.2 480 30.3

150

One pass 384 24.2 1520 95.9 480 30.3 1600 100.9 384 24.2 480 30.3

Three pass 1207.648030.3————38424.2——

Two pass 213 13.4 765 48.3 255 16.1 1020 64.4 408 25.7 510 32.2

175

One pass 408 25.7 1615 101.9 510 32.2 1700 107.3 408 25.7 510 32.2

Three pass 1288.051032.2————40825.7——

Two pass 241 15.2 869 54.8 290 18.3 1158 731.0 463 29.2 579 36.5

200

One pass 463 29.2 1834 115.7 579 36.5 1930 121.8 463 29.2 579 36.5

Three pass 1459.157936.5————46329.2——

Two pass 403 25.4 1149 91.4 483 30.5 1932 121.9 773 48.8 966 60.9

325

One pass 773 48.8 3059 193.0 966 60.9 3220 203.2 773 48.8 966 60.9

Three pass 24215.296660.9————77348.8——

Two pass 429 27.0 1544 97.4 515 32.5 2058 129.8 823 51.9 1029 64.9

350

One pass 823 51.9 3259 205.6 1029 64.9 3430 216.4 823 51.9 1029 64.9

Three pass 257 16.2 1029 64.9 ————82351.9——

Two pass 481 30.4 1733 109.3 578 36.4 2310 145.7 924 58.3 1155 72.9

400

One pass 924 58.3 3658 230.8 1155 72.9 3850 242.9 924 58.3 1155 72.9

Three pass 289 18.2 1155 72.9 ————92458.3——

*Maximum condenser fluid temperature shown for standard condensing option. High condensing or heat machine option may have leaving fluid temperatures up to 140 F (60 C) and entering up to 128 F (53.3 C).

40 F (4.4 C)/ 45 F (7.2 C)

Minimum

Flow Rate

GPM L/s GPM L/s GPM L/s GPM L/s GPM L/s GPM L/s

60 F (15.6 C)/

70 F (21.1 C)

Maximum Flow Rate

70 F (21.1 C)/

65 F (18.3 C)

Minimum Flow Rate

CAUTION

Operation below minimum flow rate could generate alarms, which could result in damage to the cooler.

Consult application data section in the Product Data literature and job design requirements to determine flow rate requirements for a particular installation.

118 F (47.8 C)/

110 F (43.3 C)

Maximum Flow Rate

Evaporator Condenser

Nominal

Flow Rate

Nominal

Flow Rate

Page 49

Fig. 28 — 30XW325-400 Evaporator Marine Waterbox

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

(0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (157.7) (189.3)

pass

gpm

(L/s)

Evaporator Flow Rate

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

ft wg

(0)

(14.9)

(29.8)

(44.8)

(59.7)

(74.6)

(89.5)

(104.4)

(119.4)

(kPa)

Pressure Drop

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

A30-4691

Fig. 29 — 30XW150-200 Evaporator NIH Flange and NIH Victaulic

0 500 1000 1500 2000 gpm (0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (L/s)

2 pass

1 pass

3 pass

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

(0)

(14.9)

(29.8)

(44.8)

(59.7)

(74.6)

(89.5)

(104.4)

(119.4)

ft wg

(kPa)

Pressure Drop

Evaporator Flow Rate

A30-4834

LEGEND

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

NIH — Nozzle-In-Head

Page 50

0 500 1000 1500 2000

(0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2)

Evaporator Flow Rate

1 pass

pass

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

ft wg

gpm

(L/s)

(0)

(14.9)

(29.8)

(44.8)

(59.7)

(74.6)

(89.5)

(104.4)

(119.4)

(kPa)

Pressure Drop

LEGEND

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

NIH — Nozzle-In-Head

A30-4692

Fig. 30 — 30XW325-400 Evaporator NIH Flange

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

(0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (157.7) (189.3)

Evaporator Flow Rate

pass

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

ft wg

(0)

(14.9)

(29.8)

(44.8)

(59.7)

(74.6)

(89.5)

(104.4)

(119.4)

(kPa)

Pressure Drop

gpm (L/s)

LEGEND

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

NIH — Nozzle-In-Head

A30-4693

Fig. 31 — 30XW325-400 Evaporator NIH Victaulic

Page 51

Fig. 32 — 30XW150-200 Condenser Marine Waterbox

A30-4835

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of condenser water flow rates represented.

0 500 1000 1500 2000 gpm (0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (L/s)

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

Condenser Flow Rate

2 pass

1 pass

(0)

(14.9)

(29.8)

(44.8)

(59.7)

(74.6)

(89.5)

(104.4)

(119.4)

ft wg

(kPa)

Pressure Drop

Fig. 33 — 30XW325-400 Condenser Marine Waterbox

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of condenser water flow rates represented.

A30-4694

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

ft wg

gpm

(L/s)

(0)

(14.9)

(29.8)

(44.8)

(59.7)

(74.6)

(89.5)

(104.4)

(119.4)

(kPa)

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500

(0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (157.7) (189.3) (220.8)

Condenser Flow Rate

Pressure Drop

2 pass

ass

Page 52

Fig. 34 — 30XW150-200 Condenser NIH Flange

A30-4836

LEGEND

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

NIH — Nozzle-In-Head

(kPa)

LEGEND

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

NIH — Nozzle-In-Head

A30-4695

Fig. 35 — 30XW325-400 Condenser NIH Flange

ft wg

(0)

40.00

35.00

30.00

25.00

20.00

15.00

10.00

5.00

0.00

(119.4)

(104.4)

(89.5)

(74.6)

(59.7)

(44.8)

Pressure Drop

(29.8)

(14.9)

2 pass

1 pass

0 500 1000 1500 2000 gpm (0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (L/s)

Condenser Flow Rate

(kPa)

(119.4)

(104.4)

(89.5)

(74.6)

(59.7)

(44.8)

ft wg

40.00

35.00

30.00

25.00

20.00

15.00

Pressure Drop

(0)

10.00

5.00

0.00

(29.8)

(14.9)

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 (0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (157.7)

2 pass

Condenser Flow Rate

1 pass

gpm (L/s)

Page 53

Fig. 36 — 30XW150-200 Condenser NIH Victaulic

A30-4837

LEGEND

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

NIH — Nozzle-In-Head

(kPa)

Fig. 37 — 30XW325-400 Condenser NIH Victaulic

LEGEND

NOTE: The table above represents pressure drops only. The table does not imply that the chiller can be properly applied over the entire range of evaporator water flow rates represented.

NIH — Nozzle-In-Head

A30-4696

2 pass

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

ft wg

gpm

(L/s)

(0)

(14.9)

(29.8)

(44.8)

(59.7)

(74.6)

(89.5)

(104.4)

(119.4)

(kPa)

0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500

(0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (157.7) (189.3) (220.8)

Condenser Flow Rate

Pressure Drop

ft wg

(0)

40.00

35.00

30.00

25.00

20.00

15.00

10.00

5.00

0.00

(119.4)

(104.4)

(89.5)

(74.6)

(59.7)

(44.8)

Pressure Drop

(29.8)

(14.9)

2 pass

0 500 1000 1500 2000 gpm (0) (31.5) (63.1) (94.6) (126.2) (L/s)

Condenser Flow Rate

Page 54

OPERATION

Sequence of Operation —

the chiller, the cooler and condenser pumps will start. After verifying water flow, the control will monitor the entering and leaving water temperatures. If the need for mechanical cooling is determined, the control decides which circuit and compressor to start. The control will start the required compressor completely unloaded. The control will continue to load this circuit by moving the slide valve to satisfy cooling requirements. Once fully loaded, the control will start an additional circuit to satisfy the load as required. Shutdown of each circuit under normal conditions occurs in the opposite sequence to loading. Once the circuit is fully unloaded the compressor is shut off and the EXV will close completely.

With a command to start

Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation — With a

command to start the chiller, the master chiller determines which chiller will become the lead chiller based on the configuration of Lead Lag Select, LLBL and Lead/Lag Balance Da- ta, LLBD. The lead chiller is always started first and the lag chiller is held at zero percent capacity by the master chiller forcing the lag demand limit value to 0%. If Lead Pulldown Time (Lead Pulldown Time, LPUL) has been configured, the lead chiller will continue to operate alone for that specified time. After the Lead Pulldown Time timer has elapsed and when the lead chiller is fully loaded, either all available compression is on or at the master demand limit value, then the lag start timer (Lag Start Timer, LLDY) is initiated. When the pulldown timer and lag start timer has elapsed and the Combined Leaving Chilled Water Temperature is more than 3° F (1.7° C) above the set point, then the lag chiller is started. If the lag chiller’s water pump was not started when the machines went into occupied mode, the lag chiller water pump will be started. The lag chiller will start with the master chiller forcing the lag chiller demand limit value (LAG_LIM) to the master’s demand limit value. If lead/lag capacity balance is selected, once the lag chiller has started, the master shall try to keep the difference in capacity between lead and lag less than 20%. The master shall then be responsible for water loop capacity

calculation, and will determine which chiller, the lead or lag, will increase or decrease capacity. When the load reduces, the lag chiller will be the first chiller to unload. To accomplish this, the lead chiller set point is decreased by 4° F (2.2° C) until the lag chiller unloads.

PUMP OPERATION — For parallel chiller pump operation, the lead chiller’s water pump will be started. The lag chiller’s water pump will be maintained off if Lag Unit Pump Control, LAGP=0. The internal algorithm of lead chiller will control ca- pacity of the lead chiller.

For series chiller operation, the pump is always controlled by the master chiller.

Operating Modes — Operating modes are override

modes that affect normal operation of the equipment. More than one operating mode can be in effect at the same time. Some operating modes have corresponding capacity control overrides in the Capacity Control Overrides section on page 43.

For the Touch Pilot display, the status of the operating modes can be found in the MODES submenu, which is under the STATUS menu. Each operating mode and its status (Yes = active, No = inactive) is listed.

For the Navigator display, the status of the operating modes can be found in the MODE submenu under the OPERATING MODES menu. The 6 top priority operating modes are displayed in MD01 through MD06. To view the modes with the Navigator display:

ITEM ITEM EXPANSION PATH VALUE MD01 First Active Mode Operating modes MODE 0-32 MD02 Second Active Mode Operating modes MODE 0-32 MD03 Third Active Mode Operating modes MODE 0-32 MD04 Fourth Active Mode Operating modes MODE 0-32 MD05 Fifth Active Mode Operating modes MODE 0-32 MD06 Sixth Active Mode Operating modes MODE 0-32

See Table 37 for a list of operating modes.

NAVIGATOR OPERATING

MODE NUMBER

01 Startup Delay in Effect Startup Delay in Effect 2 Yes/No 02 Second Setpoint in Use Second Setpoint in Use 3 Yes/No 03 Reset in Effect Reset in Effect 4 Yes/No 04 Demand Limit Active Demand Limit Active 5 Yes/No 05 Ramp Loading Active Ramp Loading Active 6 Yes/No 06 Cooler Heater Active Cooler Heater Active 7 Yes/No 07 Cooler Pumps Rotation Cooler Pumps Rotation 8 Yes/No 08 Pump Periodic Start Pump Periodic Start 9 Yes/No 09 Night Low Noise Active Night Low Noise Active 10 Yes/No 10 System Manager Active System Manager Active 11 Yes/No 11 Mast Slave Ctrl Active Mast Slave Active 12 Yes/No 12 Auto Changeover Active Auto Changeover Active 13 Yes/No 13 Free Cooling Active Free Cooling Active 14 Yes/No 14 Reclaim Active Reclaim Active 15 Yes/No 15 Electric Heat Active Electric Heat Active 16 Yes/No 16 Heating Low EWT Lockout Heating Low EWT Lockout 17 Yes/No 17 Condenser Pumps Rotation Condenser Pumps Rotation 18 Yes/No 18 Ice Mode in Effect Ice Mode in Effect 19 Yes/No 19 Defrost Active on Cir A Defrost Active on Cir A 20 Yes/No 20 Defrost Active on Cir B Defrost Active on Cir B 21 Yes/No 21 Low Suction Circuit A Low Suction Circuit A 22 Yes/No 22 Low Suction Circuit B Low Suction Circuit B 23 Yes/No 24 High DGT Circuit A High DGT Circuit A 25 Yes/No 25 High DGT Circuit B High DGT Circuit B 26 Yes/No 27 High Pres Override Cir A High Pres Override Cir A 28 Yes/No 28 High Pres Override Cir B High Pres Override Cir B 29 Yes/No 30 Low Superheat Circuit A Low Superheat Circuit A 31 Yes/No 31 Low Superheat Circuit B Low Superheat Circuit B 32 Yes/No

Table 37 — 30XW Operating Modes

NAVIGATOR EXPANSION TOUCH PILOT DISCRIPTION

TOUCH PILOT LINE NUMBER

TOUCH PILOT

VAL UE

Page 55

STARTUP DELAY IN EFFECT — This mode is checked for when the unit is started. This mode is active when the Minutes Off Time (Unit Off to On Delay, DELY) timer is active. The unit will not start until the timer has expired. The mode will terminate when the timer expires.

SECOND SETPOINT IN USE — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. The mode is active when Cooling Setpoint 2 (Cooling Setpoint 2, CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (Cooling Ice Setpoint, CSP.3) is in use. While in this mode, the Active Setpoint (Current Setpoint, SETP) will show the CSP.2 or CSP.3 value.

While in this mode, the unit will operate to the Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (CSP.3). The mode will termi- nate when the Cooling Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) is no longer in use.

RESET IN EFFECT — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. The mode will be active when Temperature Reset (Cooling Reset Select, CRST) is enabled either by CRST=1 (Outside Air Temperature), CRST=2 (Return Water), CRST=3 (4-20 mA Input), or CRST=4 (Space Temperature) and reset is active.

While in this mode, the Active Setpoint (Current Setpoint, SETP) will be modified according to the programmed information and will be displayed as the Control Point (Control Point, CTPT). The mode will terminate when the Temperature Reset is not modifying the active leaving water set point, causing SETP to be the same as CTPT.

DEMAND LIMIT ACTIVE — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. The mode is active when Demand Limit (Demand Limit Type Select, DMDC) is enabled either by DMDC=1 (Switch), DMDC=2 (4-20 mA Input), or the Night Time Low Sound Capacity Limit (Capacity Limit, LS.LT).

The Active Demand Limit Value (Active Demand Limit Va l, LIM) will display the current demand limit according to the programmed information and the unit’s capacity will be reduced to the amount shown or lower. The mode will terminate when the Demand Limit command has been removed.

RAMP LOADING ACTIVE — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. The mode is active when Ramp Loading (Ramp Loading Select, RL.S) is enabled and the following conditions are met:

1. The leaving water temperature is more than 4° F (2.2° C) from the Control Point (Control Point, CTPT), and

2. The rate of change of the leaving water temperature is greater than the Cool Ramp Loading (Cooling Ramp Loading, CRMP).

The control will limit the percent capacity increase until one of the two conditions above are no longer met, then the mode will terminate.

COOLER PUMPS ROTATION — This mode is checked for whether the unit is ON or OFF. The mode is active when the Cooler Pump Sequence (Cooler Pump Run Status, PUMP=2) (2 Pumps Automatic Changeover) and the Pump Rotation Delta Timer (Pump Auto Rotation Delay, ROT.P) have expired.

The control will switch the operation of the pumps. The lead pump will operate normally. The lag pump will be started, becoming the lead, and then the original lead pump will be shut down. This mode will terminate when the pump operation has been completed.

PUMP PERIODIC START — This mode is active when the cooler pump is started due to the Periodic Pump Start configuration (Pump Sticking Protection, PM.PS=YES). If the pump has not run that day, a pump will be started and will run for 2 seconds at 2:00 PM. If the machine is equipped with dual pumps, Pump no. 1 will run on even days (such as day 2, 4, 6 of the month). Pump no. 2 will run on odd days (such as day 1,

3, 5 of the month). The mode will terminate when the pump shuts down.

SYSTEM MANAGER ACTIVE — This mode is checked when the unit is ON or OFF. This mode is active if a System Manager such as Building Supervisor, Chillervisor System Manager, or another CCN device is controlling the machine.

When this mode is active, the machine will respond to the specific commands received from the System Manager. The mode will be terminated if the System Manager control is released.

MASTER SLAVE CONTROL ACTIVE — This mode is checked for if the machine is ON. This mode is active if Master Slave Control has been enabled. This occurs when two machines are programmed, one as the master (Master/Slave Se-

lect, MSSL=1 [Master]) and the other as a slave (Master/ Slave Select, MSSL=2 [Slave]).

Both the master and slave machines will respond to the capacity control commands issued by the master controller. This may include control point changes and demand limit commands. This mode will terminate when Master Slave Control has been disabled.

AUTO CHANGEOVER ACTIVE — This mode is not supported.

FREE COOLING ACTIVE — This mode is not supported. RECLAIM ACTIVE — This mode is not supported. ELECTRIC HEAT ACTIVE — This mode is not supported. HEATING LOW EWT LOCKOUT — This mode is not

supported. CONDENSER PUMPS ROTATION — This mode is

checked for whether the unit is ON or OFF. The mode is active when the condenser pump sequence (Condenser Pump Sequence, HPUM = Yes) and the pump rotation delta timer (Pump Auto Rotation Delay, ROT.P) have expired.

ICE MODE IN EFFECT — This mode is checked for when the unit is ON. This mode is active when Ice Setpoint (Cooling Ice Setpoint, CSP.3) is in use. While in this mode, the Active Setpoint (Current Setpoint, SETP) will show the Setpoint, CSP.3 value and the unit will operate to the Ice Set- point (CSP.3). This mode will terminate when the Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) is no longer in use.

DEFROST ACTIVE ON CIR A — This mode is not supported. DEFROST ACTIVE ON CIR B — This mode is not supported. LOW SUCTION CIRCUIT A

LOW SUCTION CIRCUIT B These modes are checked when the circuit is ON. The appropriate circuit mode will be active if one of the following conditions is true:

1. If the circuit’s saturated suction temperature (SST) is more than 6° F (3.3° C) less than the freeze point and both the cooler approach (Leaving Water Temperature – SST) and superheat (Suction Gas Temperature – SST) are greater than 15° F (8.3° C).

2. If the circuit is ON and the circuit’s SST is more than 18º F (10.0º C) below the freeze point for more than 90 seconds.

3. If the circuit’s saturated suction temperature is more than 6° F (3.3° C) below the freeze point for more than 3 minutes.

For a fresh water system (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD =1), the freeze point is 34° F (1.1° C). For medium temperature brine systems, (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD=2), the freeze point is Brine Freeze Set Point (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP).

For criterion 1, no additional capacity will be added. For criteria 2 and 3 capacity will be decreased on the circuit. The mode will terminate when the circuit’s SST is greater than the freeze point minus 6° F (3.3° C) or the circuit has alarmed.

Cooling Ice

Page 56

If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for

Alarms 56 and 57 on page 75. HIGH DGT CIRCUIT A

HIGH DGT CIRCUIT B — The capacity of the affected circuit may be increased to reduce circuit discharge gas temperature.

HIGH PRES OVERRIDE CIR A HIGH PRES OVERRIDE CIR B — This mode is checked for when the circuit is ON. The appropriate circuit mode will be active if the discharge pressure for the circuit, Discharge Pressure Circuit A (Discharge Pressure, DP.A), Discharge Pressure Circuit B (Discharge Pressure, DP.B), or Discharge Pressure Circuit C (Discharge Pressure, DP.C), is greater than the High Pressure Threshold (High Pressure Threshold, HP.TH).

The capacity of the affected circuit will be reduced. Two minutes following the capacity reduction, the circuit’s saturated condensing temperature (SCT affected circuit will not be allowed to add capacity for at least 5

) is calculated and stored. The

t+2

minutes following the capacity reduction. If after 5 minutes, the circuit’s saturated condensing temperature is less than SCT

–3° F (1.7° C), and then if required, percent capacity

t+2

will be added. If additional capacity is required, the control will look for other circuits to add capacity.

This mode will terminate once the circuit’s saturated condensing temperature is less than SCT

–3° F (1.7° C).

t+2

If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for Alarm A1.03. on page 81.

LOW SUPERHEAT CIRCUIT A LOW SUPERHEAT CIRCUIT B — This mode is checked for when the circuit is ON. The appropriate circuit mode will be active if the circuit’s superheat (discharge gas temperature — SCT) is less than 18° F (10° C).

No additional capacity will be added until the circuit’s superheat is greater than 18° F (10° C). The control will look for other circuits to add capacity if additional steps of capacity are required. This mode will terminate once the affected circuit’s superheat is greater than 18° F (10° C).

If this condition is encountered, see Possible Causes for Alarms P.11 and P.12 on page 77.

Sensors — The electronic control uses up to 13 thermistors

to sense temperatures and up to 8 transducers to sense pressure for controlling chiller operation. These sensors are outlined below. See Fig. 38 for thermistor and transducer locations.

THERMISTORS (Tables 38-39B) — Thermistors that are monitoring the chiller’s operation include: Cooler Entering Water, Cooler Leaving Water, Condenser Entering Water, Condenser Leaving Water, Dual Chiller Leaving Water, Compressor Suction Gas Temperature, Compressor Discharge Gas Temperature, Economizer Temperature, and Compressor Motor Temperature. These thermistors are 5 kat 77 F (25 C) and are identical in temperature versus resistance. The Space Temperature Thermistor is 10 kat 77 F (25 C) and has a different temperature vs. resistance. See Fig. 38 for thermistor locations.

Cooler Leaving Water Sensor is installed in a well in the leaving water nozzle of the cooler. See Fig. 39 and 40.

Cooler Entering Water Sensor tor is factory-installed in a well in the entering water nozzle of the cooler.

Condenser Leaving Water Sensor — machine options, this thermistor is installed in a well in the leaving water nozzle of the condenser. See Fig. 39 and 40.

Condenser Entering Water Sensor machine options, this thermistor is factory-installed in a well in the entering water nozzle of the condenser.

— On all sizes, this thermistor

— On all sizes, this thermis-

On all sizes with heat

— On all sizes with heat

Compressor Suction Gas Temperature

— On all sizes, this thermistor is factory-installed in a well located on the compressor of each circuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit.

Compressor Discharge Gas Temperature

— On all sizes, this thermistor is factory-installed in a well located in the discharge end of the compressor for the circuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit.

Economizer Temperature

(sizes 175,200,350,400 only) — On all sizes, this thermistor is factory-installed in a friction fit well located in the economizer line for the circuit. There is one thermistor for each circuit.

Compressor Motor Temperature

— On all sizes, this thermistor is embedded in the motor windings. There are two thermistors in each compressor. One spare is provided.

Remote Space Temperature

— This sensor (part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is a field-installed accessory mounted in the indoor space and is used for water temperature reset. The sensor should be installed as a wall-mounted thermostat would be (in the conditioned space where it will not be subjected to either a cooling or heating source or direct exposure to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).

Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to terminals in the unit main control box. The space temperature sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11 female connector. The RJ11 connector is used to access the Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN) system at the sensor. See Fig. 39 and 40.

To connect the space temperature sensor (see Fig. 41):

1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for the application, connect one wire of the twisted pair to one SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other SEN terminal located under the cover of the space temperature sensor.

2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 7 and 8 on TB6 located in the unit control box.

Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11 connector into the CCN:

1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white (ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)

2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the space temperature sensor terminal block.

3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of the space temperature sensor.

4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the space temperature sensor.

IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11 connector wiring MUST be identical to the CCN communication bus wire used for the entire network. Refer to Table 11 for acceptable wiring.

5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to the remainder of the CCN communication bus.

NOTE: The Energy Management Module (EMM) is required for this accessory.

TRANSDUCERS — There are four pressure transducers per circuit (3 per circuit for sizes 150,325), and two different types of transducers: low pressure (green connector) and high pressure (black connector). See Fig. 38 for transducer locations.

Low-pressure type:

• Suction pressure transducer (SPT)

• Economizer pressure transducer (EPT) High-pressure type:

• Discharge pressure transducer (DPT)

• Oil pressure transducer (OPT)

Page 57

HPSB

DGTA

HPSA

DGTB

EPTB

(350, 400 ONLY)

ECTB

(350, 400 ONLY)

EPTA (175, 200, 350, 400 ONLY)

ECTA (175, 200, 350, 400 ONLY)

A30-4838

LEGEND

*Not visible from angle shown.

DGT — Discharge Gas Thermistor DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer ECT — Economizer Gas Thermistor EPT — Economizer Pressure Transducer HPS — High-Pressure Switch OPT — Oil Pressure Transducer SGT — Suction Gas Thermistor SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

Fig. 38 — Thermistor and Transducer Locations

A30-4839

SGTA

DPTA

DPTB

SGTB

SPTA*

SPTB*

OPTA

OPTB

Page 58

Table 38 — Thermistor Identification

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25 98,010 –24 94,707 –23 91,522 –22 88,449 –21 85,486 –20 82,627 –19 79,871 –18 77,212 –17 74,648 –16 72,175 –15 69,790 –14 67,490 –13 65,272 –12 63,133 –11 61,070 –10 59,081

–9 57,162 –8 55,311 –7 53,526 –6 51,804 –5 50,143 –4 48,541 –3 46,996 –2 45,505 –1 44,066

0 42,679 1 41,339 2 40,047 3 38,800 4 37,596 5 36,435 6 35,313 7 34,231 8 33,185

9 32,176 10 31,202 11 30,260 12 29,351 13 28,473 14 27,624 15 26,804 16 26,011 17 25,245 18 24,505 19 23,789 20 23,096 21 22,427 22 21,779 23 21,153 24 20,547 25 19,960 26 19,393 27 18,843 28 18,311 29 17,796 30 17,297 31 16,814 32 16,346 33 15,892 34 15,453 35 15,027 36 14,614 37 14,214

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

38 13,826 39 13,449 40 13,084 41 12,730 42 12,387 43 12,053 44 11,730 45 11,416 46 11,112 47 10,816 48 10,529 49 10,250 50 9,979 51 9,717 52 9,461 53 9,213 54 8,973 55 8,739 56 8,511 57 8,291 58 8,076 59 7,686 60 7,665 61 7,468 62 7,277 63 7,091 64 6,911 65 6,735 66 6,564 67 6,399 68 6,238 69 6,081 70 5,929 71 5,781 72 5,637 73 5,497 74 5,361 75 5,229 76 5,101 77 4,976 78 4,855 79 4,737 80 4,622 81 4,511 82 4,403 83 4,298 84 4,196 85 4,096 86

4,000

87 3,906 88 3,814 89 3,726 90 3,640 91 3,556 92 3,474 93 3,395 94 3,318 95 3,243 96 3,170 97 3,099 98 3,031 99 2,964

100 2,898

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

101 2,835 102 2,773 103 2,713 104 2,655 105 2,597 106 2,542 107 2,488 108 2,436 109 2,385 110 2,335 111 2,286 112 2,239 113 2,192 114 2,147 115 2,103 116 2,060 117 2,018 118 1,977 119 1,937 120 1,898 121 1,860 122 1,822 123 1,786 124 1,750 125 1,715 126 1,680 127 1,647 128 1,614 129 1,582 130 1,550 131 1,519 132 1,489 133 1,459 134 1,430 135 1,401 136 1,373 137 1,345 138 1,318 139 1,291 140 1,265 141 1,240 142 1,214 143 1,190 144 1,165 145 1,141 146 1,118 147 1,095 148 1,072 149

1,050

150 1,029 151 1,007 152 986 153 965 154 945 155 925 156 906 157 887 158 868 159 850 160 832 161 815 162 798 163 782

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

164 765 165 750 166 734 167 719 168 705 169 690 170 677 171 663 172 650 173 638 174 626 175 614 176 602 177 591 178 581 179 570 180 561 181 551 182 542 183 533 184 524 185 516 186 508 187 501 188 494 189 487 190 480 191 473 192 467 193 461 194 456 195 450 196 445 197 439 198 434 199 429 200 424 201 419 202 415 203 410 204 405 205 401 206 396 207 391 208 386 209 382 210 377 211 372 212 367 213 361 214 356 215 350 216 344 217 338 218 332 219 325 220 318 221 311 222 304 223 297 224 289 225 282

THERMISTOR ID DESCRIPTION RESISTANCE AT 77 F (25 C) CONNECTION POINT

EWT Evaporator Entering Water Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH2

LWT Evaporator Leaving Water Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH1 CEWT Condenser Entering Water Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH4 CLWT Condenser Leaving Water Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH5

SGTA* Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor 5k  EXV1-J3-THA SGTB* Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor 5k  EXV2-J3-THA

DGTA Circuit A Discharge Gas Thermistor 5k  CPM-A-J9-CH02 DGTB Circuit B Discharge Gas Thermistor 5k  CPM-B-J9-CH02 ECTA Circuit A Economizer Thermistor 5k  EXV1-J3-THB ECTB Circuit B Economizer Thermistor 5k  EXV2-J3-THB DUAL Dual Chiller LWT Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH3 CAMT Circuit A Motor Temperature 5k  CPM-A-J9-CH01 CBMT Circuit B Motor Temperature 5k  CPM-B-J9-CH01

SPT Space Temperature Thermistor 10k  EMM-J6-CH2

*SGTA and SGTB for 30XW150-325 units are connected to the EXV1 board.

Table 39A — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs Resistance

Page 59

Table 39B — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs Resistance

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

3 14,026 4 13,342 5 12,696 6 12,085 7 11,506 8 10,959

9 10,441 10 9,949 11 9,485 12 9,044 13 8,627 14 8,231 15 7,855 16 7,499 17 7,161 18 6,840 19 6,536 20 6,246 21 5,971 22 5,710 23 5,461 24 5,225 25 5,000 26 4,786 27 4,583 28 4,389 29 4,204 30 4,028 31 3,861 32 3,701 33 3,549 34 3,404 35 3,266 36 3,134 37 3,008

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

38 2,888 39 2,773 40 2,663 41 2,559 42 2,459 43 2,363 44 2,272 45 2,184 46 2,101 47 2,021 48 1,944 49 1,871 50 1,801 51 1,734 52 1,670 53 1,609 54 1,550 55 1,493 56 1,439 57 1,387 58 1,337 59 1,290 60 1,244 61 1,200 62 1,158 63 1,118 64 1,079 65 1,041 66 1,006 67 971 68 938 69 906 70 876 71 836 72 805

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32 100,260 –31 94,165 –30 88,480 –29 83,170 –28 78,125 –27 73,580 –26 69,250 –25 65,205 –24 61,420 –23 57,875 –22 54,555 –21 51,450 –20 48,536 –19 45,807 –18 43,247 –17 40,845 –16 38,592 –15 38,476 –14 34,489 –13 32,621 –12 30,866 –11 29,216 –10 27,633

–9 26,202 –8 24,827 –7 23,532 –6 22,313 –5 21,163 –4 20,079 –3 19,058 –2 18,094 –1 17,184

0 16,325 1 15,515 2 14,749

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

73 775 74 747 75 719 76 693 77 669 78 645 79 623 80 602 81 583 82 564 83 547 84 531 85 516 86 502 87 489 88 477 89 466 90 456 91 446 92 436 93 427 94 419 95 410 96 402 97 393 98 385

99 376 100 367 101 357 102 346 103 335 104 324 105 312 106 299 107 285

6" MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

1.188 in.

2.315 in.

1/4-18 NPT

Fig. 40 — Dual Leaving Water Thermistor Well

(00PPG000008000A)

a30-4080

Fig. 41 — Typical Remote Space Temperature

Sensor (33ZCT55SPT) Wiring

TB6

SEN

SENSOR

a30-4081

O-RING

BRASS NUT 3/8 - 24 FOR ASSEMBLY ON BRASS WELL

Fig. 39 — 5K Thermistor

(30RB660036 Thermistor Kit)

a30-4079

SERVICE

Economizer Assembly —

30XW175,200,350,400 units has an economizer assembly. The 30XW150,325 units do not have an economizer and have one main electronic expansion valve. The 30XW150,325 units are controlled the same way as units with a separate economizer assembly. See Fig. 42.

Each circuit on

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) — See Fig. 43

for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid refrigerant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve operates through an electronically controlled activation of a stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position unless power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator windings for rotation in either direction. The direction depends on the phase relationship of the power pulses.

The motor directly operates the spindle, which has rotating movements that are transformed into linear motion by the transmission in the cage assembly. The valve cone is a V-port type which includes a positive shut-off when closed.

The large number of steps and long stroke results in very accurate control of the refrigerant flow. The stepper motor has either 4260 (main) or 2785 (economizer) steps.

MAIN EXV CONTROL — Each circuit has a thermistor located in a well in the discharge line of the compressor (DGT) and another one located in the compressor motor cavity (SGT). Each circuit also has discharge and suction pressure transducer. Discharge and suction pressure as measured by the transducers are converted to saturated temperatures. The main control logic for the EXV uses discharge superheat to control the position of the EXV. The difference between the temperature of the discharge gas and the saturated discharge temperature is the superheat. The EXV module controls the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper motor to maintain the discharge superheat set point.

Page 60

The EXV control logic has several overrides, which are also

Fig. 42 — Economizer Assembly

LEGEND

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve 1—Fuse Plug Adaptor 2—High Flow Access Fitting 3—Filter Drier 4—Main Expansion Valve 5—Economizer Expansion Valve 6—Brazed Plate Heat Exchanger

Fig. 43 — Cutaway Views of the Electronic Expansion Valve

1. Cable

2. Glass Seal

3. Motor Housing

4. Stepper Motor

5. Bearing

6. Lead Screw

7. Insert

8. Valve Piston

9. Valve Seat

10. Valve Port

a30-4241

used to control the position of the EXV.

• Approach between SST and LWT

• Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) Approach

— If the approach (pinch), which is the difference between leaving fluid temperature and saturated suction temperature, is equal to or less than the pinch set point then the EXV will not open any further even though discharge superheat set point is not met. Pinch set point is calculated using suction superheat, discharge superheat and pinch offset. Pinch offset is used to adjust calculated pinch set point do to accuracy of transducers and thermistors.

MOP

— The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction temperature to 55 F (12.8 C). This makes it possible for the chiller to start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading the compressor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maximum operating pressure). If the SST is equal to or greater than the MOP set point then the MBB will try to control the EXV position to maintain the MOP set point.

The discharge superheat leaving the compressor is maintained between approximately 18 and 25 F (10 and 14 C), or less. Because EXV status is communicated to the Main Base Board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV modules, it is possible to track the valve position. The unit is then protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. During initial start-up, the EXV is fully closed. After an initialization period, valve position is tracked by the EXV module by constantly monitoring the amount of valve movement.

ECONOMIZER EXV CONTROL — The economizer EXV is controlled by the circuit EXV board. There is an economizer gas temperature thermistor and economizer pressure transducer located in the line, which runs from the economizer assembly to the compressor. The economizer pressure is converted to saturated temperature and is used to calculate economizer superheat. Economizer superheat equals economizer temperature minus saturated economizer temperature. The economizer EXV only operates during normal conditions when the capacity of the circuit is greater than 70%. Once the capacity of the circuit is greater than 70% the MBB will start controlling the economizer

EXV to maintain economizer superheat set point, which is approximately 8° to 12° F (4.4° to 6.7° C). If the circuit capacity is less than 70%, the economizer EXV will be closed.

The economizer EXV has one override. If the discharge gas temperature exceeds 195 F (90.6 C) the economizer EXV will start to open. The EXV will be controlled to maintain discharge gas temperature at approximately 195 F (90.6 C).

If it appears that main EXV or economizer EXV is not properly controlling circuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there are a number of checks that can be made using test functions and initialization features built into the microprocessor control. See the Service Test section to test EXVs.

MAIN EXV CONNECTOR

ECONOMIZER

EXV CONNECTOR

NAME PLATE

Page 61

EXV TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE — There are two different economizer EXVs. Both of the economizer EXVs have a total of 2785 steps. There are three different main EXVs, which all have a total of 4260 steps. The EXV motor moves at 150 steps per second. Commanding the valve to either 0% or 100% will add an additional 160 steps to the move, to ensure the valve is open or closed completely.

Follow the steps below to diagnose and correct EXV problems. Check EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/Remote (EOR) Contact switch to the Off position. Check the appropriate circuit EXV, Circuit A EXV % Open (Circuit A EXV Position, EXV.A) or Circuit B EXV % Open (Circuit B EXV Position, EXV.B). The current value of 0 will be displayed. Increase the EXV position to select 100% valve position. The actuator should be felt moving through the EXV. To close the valve, select 0%. The actuator should knock when it reaches the bottom of its stroke. See Table 40 for a list of EXV modes and submodes.

If the valve is not working properly, continue with the following test procedure:

Check the 8-position DIP switch on the board for the proper address (Fig. 10). Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals on the EXV module. For 30XW150,325 units, connect the positive test lead to EXV-J2A terminal 5 for Circuit A and to EXV-J2B terminal 5 for Circuit B.

For 30XW175,200,350,400 units connect positive test lead to EXV(X)-J2A terminal 5 for EXV(X) and EXV(X)-J2B terminal 5 for Economizer EXV(X). Using the Service Test procedure on page 83, move the valve output under test to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin 5 to any other pin, as board damage will occur. During the next several seconds, carefully connect the negative test lead to pins 1,2,3 and 4 in succession. Digital voltmeters will average this signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If the output remains at a constant voltage other than 6 vdc or shows 0 volts, remove the connector to the valve and recheck.

Select 0% to close the valve. NOTE: When the valve is stationary, the output from the EXV

board is 12-vdc.

See Tables 6 and 7. If a problem still exists, replace the EXV board. If the reading is correct, the expansion valve and EXV wiring should be checked. Check the EXV connector and interconnecting wiring.

1. Check color-coding and wire connections. Make sure they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV board and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.

2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin terminals.

Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. For 30XW150,325 units remove the EXV module plug EXV-J2A for Circuit A EXV and EXV-J2B for Circuit B EXV. For 30XW175,200,350,400 units remove the EXV module plug EXV(X)-J2A for main EXV and EXV(X)-J2B for economizer EXV. Check the resistance of the two windings between pins 1 and 3 for one winding and pins 2 and 4 for the other winding. The resistance should be 52 ohms (± 5.2 ohms). Also check pins 1-4 for any shorts to ground.

Inspecting/Opening Electronic Expansion Valves

IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gaskets before opening EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.

and change Service Test Enable, T.REQ from OFF to ON. A password may be required. Switch the EOR switch to the Enable position. Under the COMP submode, enable one of the compressors (CP.xn) for the cir- cuit. Let compressor run until gage on suction pressure port reads 10 psig (68.9 kPa). Turn the compressor off. The compressor will turn off. Immediately after the compressor shuts off, manually close the actuated ball valve (ABV). If the unit is equipped with suction service valves and economizer service valves, close both valves. Closing the valves will minimize the amount of charge that will have to be removed from the system after pump down.

2. Remove any remaining refrigerant from the system low side using proper recovering techniques. The economizer assembly has a

/4-in. access connection which can be used to remove charge from the inlet of the EXVs. Turn off the line voltage power supply to the compressors.

CAUTION

Ensure refrigerant is removed from both the inlet and outlet of EXV assemblies. Equipment damage could result.

3. The expansion valve motor is hermetically sealed inside the top portion of the valve. See Fig. 43. Disconnect the EXV plug. Carefully unscrew the motor portion from the body of the valve. The EXV operator will come out with the motor portion of the device. Reconnect the EXV plug.

4. Enter the appropriate EXV test step under the (QUIC) Service Test mode Locate the desired item Circuit A

EXV Position, EXV.A or Circuit B EXV Position, EXV.B. Change the position to 100%. Observe the opera-

tion of the lead screw. See Fig. 43. The motor should be turning, raising the operator closer to the motor. Motor actuator movement should be smooth and uniform from fully closed to fully open position. Select 0% and check open to closed operation. If the valve is properly connected to the processor and receiving correct signals, yet does not operate as described above, the sealed motor portion of the valve should be replaced.

Installing EXV Motor

IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gasket before opening EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.

If re-installing the motor, be sure to use a new gasket in the assembly. See Fig. 44. It is easier to install the motor assembly with the piston in the fully closed position. Insert the motor into the body of the EXV. Tighten the motor to the body to 36 ft-lb (50 N-m) and then tighten the valve another 30 degrees.

Moisture Liquid Indicator — Clear flow of liquid refrigerant indicates sufficient charge in system. Bubbles in the sight glass indicate undercharged system or presence of noncondensables. Moisture in system, measured in parts per million (ppm), changes color of indicator. See Table 41. Change filter drier at first sign of moisture in system.

IMPORTANT: Unit must be in operation at least 12 hours before moisture indicator can give an accurate reading.

With unit running, indicating element must be in contact with liquid refrigerant to give true reading.

To check the physical operation of an EXV, the following

steps must be performed.

1. Close the liquid line service valve of the circuit to be checked. Put the Enable/Off/Remote Contact (EOR) switch in the Off position. Enter the Service Test mode

Filter Drier — Whenever moisture-liquid indicator shows presence of moisture, replace filter drier(s). There is one filter drier assembly on each circuit with two cores. Refer to the Carrier Standard Service Techniques Manual, Chapter 1, Refrigerants, for details on servicing filter driers.

Page 62

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

GASKET

OPEN VALVE IN QUICK TEST SUB-MODE BEFORE DISASSEMBLING

EF05BD271 NV 32.5mm EF05BD331 NV 36mm

50Nm (36 ft-lb)+ 30°

27mm / 1

/16''

27mm / 1

/16''

DISASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY

NOTES:

1. Push down on valve piston to close valve before assembling.

2. After valve is assembled close valve in Quick Test sub-mode or cycle power before opening service valve.

Fig. 44 — Disassembly and Assembly of EXV Motor

NOTE: Open valve in Quick Test sub-mode before disassembling.

A30-4072ef

Table 40 — EXV Modes and Submodes

EXV TYPE AND CIRCUIT TOUCH PILOT™ PATH NAVIGATOR™ PATH

EXV, Circuit A Main Menu Status QCK_TST1 Q_EXVA Service Test Mode QUIC EXV.A

EXV, Circuit B Main Menu Status QCK_TST1 Q_EXVB Service Test Mode QUIC EXV.B Economizer EXV, Circuit A Main Menu Status QCK_TST1 Q_ECO_A Service Test Mode QUIC ECO.A Economizer EXV, Circuit B Main Menu Status QCK_TST1 Q_ECO_B Service Test Mode QUIC ECO.B

Table 41 — Color Indicators when Moisture is Present in Refrigerant

COLOR INDICATOR

Green — Dry <30 <45 Yellow-green — Caution 30-100 45-170 Yellow — Wet >100 >170

R-134a,

75 F (24 C)

(ppm)

R-134a,

125 F (52 C)

(ppm)

Liquid Line Service Valve — This valve is located immediately ahead of filter drier, and has a charging. In combination with compressor discharge service valve, each circuit can be pumped down into the high side for servicing.

/4-in. access connection for field

Page 63

Compressor Assembly — The 30XW units utilize

Fig. 45 — Typical 06T Compressor

A30-4841

Fig. 46 — Typical Oil System

A30-4842

LEGEND

1—Oil Pressure Transducer 2—Oil Solenoid 3—Oil Filter 4—

/4 in. FL (Female) Access Fitting

5—Shut-Off Valve 6—Oil Level Sight Glass 7—Oil Level Switch 8—

/4 in. FL (Female) Access Fitting

screw compressors with a modulating slide valve which varies capacity from 15% to 100% of compressor capacity for each circuit. See Fig. 45 for a view of a typical 06T compressor. The slide valve position is varied by opening and closing the 2 solenoid valves located on the compressor. To unload the compressor, both solenoids are deenergized. To increase in capacity both solenoid valves are energized together which will cause the slide valve to slide towards the fully loaded position. To stop the loading process solenoid 2 is energized and solenoid 1 is deenergized. This will cause the slide valve to maintain its current position. There is no feedback for the position of the slide valve. The control utilizes compressor current as an indicator of the slide valve position. Once the calculated position of the slide valve reaches 100% circuit capacity, the control will try to increase capacity again if the compressor current continues to increase. The control will continue to load the compressor until the compressor current no longer increases. At that time the control will energize both solenoids and the circuit will be considered fully loaded.

COMPRESSOR OIL SYSTEM — Each compressor/circuit has its own oil system which includes an oil filter, oil solenoid, check valve, oil level switch, oil pressure transducer, and an oil shut-off valve. A typical oil system is shown in Fig. 46. See Table 42.

Table 42 — Unit Oil Quantities

30XW UNIT SIZE

150-200 6.0 [22.7] — 325-400 5.0 [18.9] 5.0 [18.9]

OIL CHANGE (gal, [liters])

Circuit A Circuit B

U n l o a d e r P i s t o n

C h a m b e

High with

High

Pressure

Oil

E n e r g i z e d N O F L O W

V a l v e # 2 ( N O )

E n e r g i z e d

F L O W

V a l v e # 1 ( N C )

FULLY LOADED OPERATION

DISCHARGE GAS THERMISTOR

ACCESS FITTING

t e x t

D i s c h a r g e

P o r

B l e e d L i n e t o L o w P r e s s u r e S u c t i o n

H i g h P r e s s u r e O i l

HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH

C o m p r e s s i o n

P r o c e s s

S l i d e V a l v e

Loaded Position

L o a d e d P o s i t i o

SOLENOID 2

U n l o a d e r P i s t o n

C h a m b e

Drain to

Low Pressure

D e - e n e r g i z e d

V a l v e # 2 ( N O )

F L O W

D e - e n e r g i z e d

N O F L O W

V a l v e # 1 ( N C )

FULLY UNLOADED OPERATION

SUCTION TEMPERATURE

SOLENOID 1

C o m p r e s s i o n

P r o c e s

D i s c h a r g e

P o r

t e x t

Slide Valve

Unloaded Position

B l e e d L i n e t o L o w P r e s s u r e S u c t i o n

H i g h P r e s s u r e O i l

U n l o a d e r P i s t o n

C h a m b e

T r a p p e d

O i l a t H i g h

P r e s s u r

V a l v e # 2 ( N O )

E n e r g i z e d N O F L O W

D e - e n e r g i z e d

V a l v e # 1 ( N C )

MAINTAIN POSITION

MOTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1

COMMON

MOTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2

C o m p r e s s i o n

P r o c e s s

t e x t

D i s c h a r g e

P o r t

B l e e d L i n e t o L o w P r e s s u r e S u c t i o n

N O F L O W

Slide Valve

S l i d e V a l v e

P a r t L o a d P o s i t i o n

H i g h P r e s s u r e O i l

Page 64

Oil Charge

CLOSED AND UNLOCKED SUCTION SERVICE VALVE

OPENED AND LOCKED SUCTION SERVICE VALVE

Fig. 47A — Suction Service Valve Locking Device,

Closed and Unlocked

Fig. 47B — Suction Service Valve Locking Device,

Open and Locked

A30-4843

A30-4844

— When additional oil or a complete charge is

required it must meet the following specifications:

• Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emkarate RL220XL

• Oil Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inhibited polyolester-based

synthetic compressor lubricant for use with screw compressors.

• ISO Viscosity Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Do not reuse drained oil or any oil that has been exposed to

the atmosphere.

Oil is available in the following quantities from your local

Carrier representative:

QUANTITY TOTALINE PART NO.

1 Quart P903-2325 1 Gallon P903-2301 5 Gallon P903-2305

If unsure if there is low oil charge in the system, follow the

steps below:

1. If the unit shuts off repeatedly from a low oil level alert it may be an indication of inadequate oil charge; however, it could also indicate that the oil is not being recovered from the low-side of the system.

2. Begin running the unit at full load for 1

/2 hours. Use the manual Test Mode feature of Service Test if the unit does not normally run at full load.

NOTE: An adequate load must be available.

3. After running the unit for 1

/2 hours at full load, allow the unit to restart and run normally. If low oil alarms persist, continue with the following steps.

4. Close the liquid line service valve and place a pressure gage on top of the cooler. Enable the Service Test feature and turn the Enable/Off/Remote switch to the enable position. Start the desired circuit by turning it on under the TEST function: CP.A for compressor A, CP.B for compressor B, or CP.C for compressor C.

5. When the compressor starts successfully observe the cooler pressure when the pressure reads 10 psig (68.9 kPa), turn the Emergency Switch (SW2) to the OFF position. The compressor should stop.

6. Open the liquid line service valve and allow the unit to restart normally. If low oil level alarms persist, continue with the following steps.

7. If none of the previous steps were successful, the unit is low on oil charge. Add oil to the oil separator using the

/4 in. access fitting that the discharge pressure transducer

is mounted to.

8. To facilitate the oil charging process, ensure that the unit is not running when adding oil. The system is under pressure even when the unit is not running, so it is necessary to use a suitable pump to add oil to the system.

9. Using a suitable pump, add system. Continue adding oil in

/2 gal (1.9 l) of oil to the

/2 gal (1.9 l) increments until the problem is resolved, up to a maximum of 1.5 gal (5.7 l). If it is necessary to add factory oil charge levels to the system contact your local Carrier representative.

Oil Filter Maintenance

— Each circuit has one oil filter located externally to the compressor. Oil line pressure drop is monitored by the control. Oil line pressure drop is calculated by subtracting oil pressure (OP) from discharge pressure (DP). If the oil line pressure drop exceeds 30 psi (206.8 kPa) for 5 minutes the control will generate a High Oil Filter Pressure Drop alert. The High Oil Filter Pressure Drop alert will not shut down the compressor, but instead indicates that the oil filter is dirty. If oil pressure line losses exceed 50 psi

(344.7 kPa) then the control will shut down the circuit on Maximum Oil Filter Differential Pressure Failure.

CAUTION

Compressor oil is pressurized. Use proper safety precautions when relieving pressure.

Replacing the Oil Filter ed in front of the oil filter. Connect a charging hose to the

— Close the oil line ball valve locat-

/4-in. access fitting port located downstream of the valve and bleed off oil trapped between the service valve and the oil solenoid valve. A quart of oil is typically what is removed during this process. Remove the charging hose. Unscrew the nuts from both ends of the oil filter and remove the oil filter. Remove the protective caps from the new oil filter and install, being careful not to lose or damage the new O-ring located on the new oil filter. Draw a vacuum at the Schrader port. Remove the charging hose and open the oil line ball valve. Check both fittings for leaks.

Cooler

SUCTION SERVICE VALVE — The suction service valve is a factory-installed option for 30XW units. It is located in the suction outlet of the cooler. The suction service valve is bolted between the cooler outlet and the suction flange piping. The suction service valve shaft has a locking device located on the shaft to lock the valve in either a fully open position or a fully closed position. The locking device must be pulled out prior to moving the valve handle to a fully open or a fully closed position. See Fig. 47A and 47B.

Page 65

LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE — Main Base Board is pro-

Fig. 48 — Elliott Tube Plug

a30-4083

grammed to shut chiller down if leaving fluid temperature drops below 34 F (1.1 C) for cooler fluid type water or below Brine Freeze Setpoint (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP) for cooler fluid type brine. The unit will shut down without a pumpout. When fluid temperature rises to 6° F (3.3° C) above the leaving fluid set point, safety resets and chiller restarts. Reset is automatic as long as this is the first occurrence.

LOSS OF FLUID FLOW PROTECTION — All 30XW machines include an integral flow switch that protects the cooler against loss of cooler flow. In addition, all models ordered for heat reclaim duty have factory installed condenser water sensors and an integral flow switch.

TUBE PLUGGING — A leaky tube can be plugged until retubing can be done. The number of tubes plugged determines how soon the cooler must be retubed. All tubes in the cooler may be removed. Loss of unit capacity and efficiency as well as increased pump power will result from plugging tubes. Failed tubes should be replaced as soon as possible. Up to 10% of the total number of tubes per pass can be plugged before retubing is necessary. Fig. 48 shows an Elliott tube plug and a cross-sectional view of a plug in place. See Tables 43-46 for plug components. If the tube failure occurs in both circuits using tube plugs will not correct the problem. Contact your local Carrier representative for assistance.

CAUTION

Use extreme care when installing plugs to prevent damage to the tube sheet section between the holes.

Table 45 — Condenser (Sizes 325-400) Plug

Component Parts

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

For Tubes

Brass Pin 853103-2A* Brass Ring 853002-918*

For Holes without tubes

Brass Pin 853103-3*

Brass Ring 853002-988* Loctite No. 675† Locquic “N”†

*Order directly from Elliot Tube Company, Dayton, OH or RCD.

†Can be obtained locally.

Table 46 — Condenser (Sizes 325-400) Tube

Components

COMPONENT

Tube Sheet Hole Diameter 1.000 to 1.008 25.40 to 25.60 Tube O D 0.992 to 0.998 25.20 to 25.35 Tube ID after Rolling

(includes expansion due to clearance .)

LEGEND

ID — Inside Diameter OD — Outside Diameter

NOTE: Tubes replaced along heat exchanger head partitions must be flush with tube sheet (both ends).

0.918 to 0.935 23.32 to 23.75

SIZE

in. mm

Table 43 — Condenser (Sizes 150-200) and

Evaporator Plug Component Parts

COMPONENT PART NUMBER

For Tubes

Brass Pin 853103-1* Brass Ring 853002-657 or 670* (Measure inside

For Holes without Tubes

Brass Pin 853103-1A*

Brass Ring 853002-738* Loctite No. 675† Locquic “N”†

*Order directly from Elliot Tube Company, Dayton, OH or RCD.

†Can be obtained locally.

diameter of tube before ordering.)

Table 44 — Condenser (Sizes 150-200) and

Evaporator Tube Components

COMPONENT

Tube Sheet Hole Diameter 0.752 to 0.757 19.10 to 19.23 Tube O D 0.742 to 0.748 18.85 to 19.00 Tube ID after Rolling

(includes expansion due to clearance.)

LEGEND

ID — Inside Diameter OD — Outside Diameter

NOTE: Tubes replaced along heat exchanger head partitions must be flush with tube sheet (both ends).

0.666 to 0.681 16.92 to 17.30

SIZE

in. mm

RETUBING — When retubing is required, obtain service of qualified personnel experienced in boiler maintenance and repair. Most standard procedures can be followed when retubing the coolers. An 8% crush is recommended when rolling replacement tubes into the tubesheet.

Place one drop of Loctite No. 675 or equivalent on top of tube prior to rolling. This material is intended to “wick” into the area of the tube that is not rolled into the tube sheet, and prevent fluid from accumulating between the tube and the tube sheet. New tubes must also be rolled into the center tubesheet to prevent circuit to circuit leaks.

TIGHTENING COOLER HEAD BOLTS Preparation

— When reassembling cooler heads, always check the condition of the O-rings first. The O-ring should be replaced if there is visible signs of deterioration, cuts or damage. Apply a thin film of grease to the O-ring before installation. This will aid in holding the O-ring in the groove while the head is installed. Torque all bolts to the following specification and in sequence:

/4-in. Diameter Perimeter Bolts (Grade 5) . . . 200 to 225 ft-lb

(271 to 305 N-m)

1. Install all bolts finger tight.

2. Bolt tightening sequence is outlined in Fig. 49. Follow the numbering or lettering sequence so that pressure is evenly applied to O-ring.

3. Apply torque in one-third steps until required torque is reached. Load all bolts to each one-third step before proceeding to next one-third step.

4. No less than one hour later, retighten all bolts to required torque values.

5. After refrigerant is restored to system, check for refrigerant leaks using recommended industry practices.

6. Replace cooler insulation.

Page 66

INSPECTING/CLEANING HEAT EXCHANGERS — In-

Fig. 51 — Flow Switch (Typical)

LEGEND

CEWT — Condenser Entering Water Thermistor CLWT — Condenser Leaving Water Thermistor CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch EWT — Entering Water Thermistor LWT — Leaving Water Thermistor

A30-4846

Fig. 49 — Cooler Head Recommended

Bolt Torque Sequence

A30-4845

Fig. 50 — Chilled Water Flow Switch

WIRING

a30-4708

spect and clean cooler tubes at the end of the first operating season. Because these tubes have internal ridges, a rotary-type tube cleaning system is necessary to fully clean the tubes. Tube condition in the cooler will determine the scheduled frequency for cleaning, and will indicate whether water treatment is adequate in the chilled water/brine circuit. Inspect the entering and leaving water thermistor wells for signs of corrosion or scale. Replace the well if corroded or remove any scale if found.

3. If the contacts do not close with sufficient flow, then check the wiring connection to the MBB. If the input signal is not closed, then the switch needs to be replaced.

CAUTION

Hard scale may require chemical treatment for its prevention or removal. Consult a water treatment specialist for proper treatment procedures.

WATER TREATMENT — Untreated or improperly treated water may result in corrosion, scaling, erosion or algae. The services of a qualified water treatment specialist should be obtained to develop and monitor a treatment program.

CAUTION

Water must be within design flow limits, clean and treated to ensure proper machine performance and reduce the potential of tubing damage due to corrosion, scaling, and algae. Carrier assumes no responsibility for cooler damage resulting from untreated or improperly treated water.

CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH — A factory-installed flow switch is installed in the entering water nozzle for all machines. See Fig. 50 and 51. This is a thermal-dispersion flow switch. Figure 50 shows typical installation. If nuisance trips of the sensor are occurring, follow the steps below to correct:

When power is supplied to the device, a warm-up period is initiated. The warm-up period may take up to 30 seconds. When enough flow is detected, the switch contacts will close. The switch closure does not indicate minimum flow requirements have been met for the machine.

1. Check to confirm that all strainers are clean, valves are

2. Measure the pressure drop across the cooler (evaporator).

open and pumps are running. For the case of variable frequency drive (VFD) controlled pumps, ensure the minimum speed setting has not been changed.

Use the cooler pressure drop curves in Fig. 27-37 to calculate the flow and compare this to system requirements.

LWT

EWT

CLWT

CEWT

CWFS

OUT

Page 67

Refrigerant Circuit

LEAK TESTING — Units are shipped with complete operating charge of refrigerant R-134a or nitrogen (see Physical Data tables supplied in the 30XW installation instructions) and should be under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test. If there is no pressure in the system, introduce enough nitrogen to search for the leak. Repair the leak using good refrigeration practices. After leaks are repaired, system must be evacuated and dehydrated.

REFRIGERANT CHARGE — Refer to Physical Data tables supplied in the 30XW installation instructions. Immediately ahead of filter drier in each circuit is a factory-installed liquid line service valve. Each valve has a

/4-in. access connection

for charging liquid refrigerant. Charging with Unit Off and Evacuated

— Close liquid line service valve before charging. Weigh in charge shown on unit nameplate. Open liquid line service valve; start unit and allow it to run several minutes fully loaded. Check for a clear sight glass. Be sure clear condition is liquid and not vapor.

Charging with Unit Running

— If charge is to be added while unit is operating, loop water temperatures should be near the ARI rating point (54/44 F evaporator; 85/95 F condenser). At these conditions and with the circuit at full load, charge to a clear sightglass and a liquid line temperature of 90 to 93 F (32.2 to 33.9 C).

Add 5 lb (2.3 kg) of liquid charge into the fitting located on the tube entering the bottom of the cooler. This fitting is located between the electronic expansion valve (EXV) and the cooler.

Allow the system to stabilize and then recheck the liquid temperature. If needed, add additional liquid charge, 5 lb (2.3 kg) at a time, allowing the system to stabilize between each charge addition. Slowly add charge as the sight glass begins to clear to avoid overcharging.

IMPORTANT: When adjusting refrigerant charge, circulate fluid through cooler and condenser continuously to prevent freezing and possible damage to both. Do not overcharge, and never charge liquid into the low-pressure side of system.

Safety Devices — The 30XW chillers contain many

safety devices and protection logic built into the electronic control. Following is a description of the major safeties.

COMPRESSOR PROTECTION Motor Overload

(CPM) protect each compressor against overcurrent. Do not bypass the current transducers or make any changes to the factory-installed and configured headers. The configuration of these headers defines the Must Trip Amps (MTA) at which the CPM will turn the compressors off. Determine the cause for trouble and correct the problem before resetting the CPM. See Appendix D for MTA settings and configuration headers.

Each CPM board also reads the status of each compressor’s high-pressure switch. All compressors have factory-installed high-pressure switches. See Table 47.

Table 47 — High-Pressure Switch Settings

30XW UNIT

STD 217.6 +7.25, –14.5 1500 +50, –100

HIGH COND 304.5 +7.25, –14.5 2099 +50, –100

If the switch opens during operation, the compressor will be shut down. The CPM will reset automatically when the switch closes, however, a manual reset of the control is required to restart the compressor.

— The compressor protection modules

SWITCH SETTING

psig kPa

COOLER PROTECTION Low Water Temperature

— Microprocessor is programmed to shut the chiller down if the leaving fluid temperature drops below 34 F (1.1 C) for water or more than 8 F (4.4 C) below set point for Fluid Type = brine. When the fluid temperature rises 6 F (3.3 C) above the leaving fluid set point, the safety resets and the chiller restarts. Reset is automatic as long as this is the first occurrence of the day.

IMPORTANT: If unit is installed in an area where ambient temperatures fall below 32 F (0° C), a suitable corrosion-inhibited antifreeze solution must be used in the chilled water and condenser water circuit.

Relief Devices — Fusible plugs are located in each cir-

cuit between the condenser and the liquid line shutoff valve. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES — Valves are installed in each

circuit and are located on all coolers and condensers. These valves are designed to relieve if an abnormal pressure condition arises. Relief valves on all coolers relieve at 220 psi (1517 kPa). These valves should not be capped. If a valve relieves, it should be replaced. If the valve is not replaced, it may relieve at a lower pressure, or leak due to trapped dirt from the system which may prevent resealing. Valves on standard condensers relieve at 220 psi (1517 kPa). Valves on high condensing and heat reclaim units relieve at 300 psi (2068 kPa).

Pressure relief valves located on shells have

/4-in. NPT connections for relief. Some local building codes require that relieved gases be exhausted to a specific location. This connection allows conformance to this requirement. Refer to Installation Instructions for details.

MAINTENANCE

Recommended Maintenance Schedule —

lowing are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite conditions may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more often than recommended.

Every month:

• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refriger-

ant loss and presence of moisture.

Every 3 months:

• Check refrigerant charge.

• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks;

repair as necessary.

• Check chilled water and condenser flow switch operation.

• Check oil filter pressure drop. Every 12 months:

• Check all electrical connections; tighten as necessary.

• Inspect all contactors and relays; replace as necessary.

• Check accuracy of thermistors; replace if greater than ±2° F

(1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.

• Check accuracy of transducers; replace if greater than ±5 psi

(34.47 kPa) variance.

• Check to be sure that the proper concentration of antifreeze

is present in the chilled water and condenser loops, if applicable.

• Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.

• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop;

replace as necessary.

• Check chilled water and condenser strainers, clean as

necessary.

• Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all components.

• Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled

Water Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) which may indicate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if necessary.

• Obtain oil analysis; change as necessary.

The fol-

TROUBLESHOOTING

See Table 48 for an abbreviated list of symptoms, possible

causes and possible remedies.

Page 68

Table 48 — Troubleshooting

Fig. 52 — Alarm Description

A30-4847

Unit Does Not Run Check for power to unit • Check overcurrent protection device.

Unit Operates too Long or Continuously

Circuit Does Not Run Active alarm Check Alarm status. See the Alarms and Alerts section and follow

Circuit Does Not Load Active alarm Check Alarm status. See the Alarms and Alerts section and follow

Compressor Does Not Run Active alarm Check Alarm status. See the Alarms and Alerts section and follow

Chilled Water Pump is ON, but the Machine is OFF

LEGEND

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE REMEDY

• Check non-fused disconnect (if equipped).

Wrong or incorrect unit configuration Check unit configuration. Active alarm Check Alarm status. See the Alarms and Alerts section and follow

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See the Operating Modes section and follow trouble-

Low refrigerant charge Check for leak and add refrigerant. Compressor or control contacts welded Replace contactor or relay. Air in chilled water loop Purge water loop. Non-condensables in refrigerant circuit. Remove refrigerant and recharge. Inoperative EXV • Check EXV, clean or replace.

Load too high Unit may be undersized for application

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See the Operating Modes section and follow trouble-

Low saturated suction temperature See Operating Modes 21 and 22. High circuit suction superheat The circuit capacity is not allowed increase if circuit superheat is greater than 36 F

Low suction superheat The circuit capacity is not allowed to increase if the circuit superheat is less than

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See the Operating Modes section and follow trouble-

Inoperative compressor contactor • Check control wiring.

Cooler freeze protection Chilled water loop temperature too low. Check cooler heater.

• Restore power to unit.

troubleshooting instructions.

shooting instructions

• Check EXV cable, replace if necessary.

• Check EXV board for output signal.

troubleshooting instructions.

shooting instructions.

troubleshooting instructions.

shooting instructions.

(20 C). See Alarms 74 and 75 for potential causes.

18° F (10° C). See Alarms 74 and 75 for potential causes.

troubleshooting instructions.

shooting instructions.

• Check scroll protection module.

• Check contactor operation, replace if necessary.

Alarms and Alerts — The integral control system con-

stantly monitors the unit and generates warnings when abnormal or fault conditions occur. Alarms may cause either a circuit (Alert) or the whole machine (Alarm) to shut down. Alarms and Alerts are assigned codes as described in Fig. 52. The alarm/alert indicator LED on the Navigator™ module is illuminated when any alarm or alert condition is present. If an Alert is active, the Alarm Indicator LED will blink. If an Alarm is active, the Alarm Indicator LED will remain on. Currently active Alerts and Alarms can be found in (Current Alarm, ALRM).

The controller generates two types of alarms. Automatic reset alarms will reset without any intervention if the condition that caused the alarm corrects itself. Manual reset alarms require the service technician to check for the alarm cause and reset the alarm. The following method must be followed to reset manual alarms:

Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the alarm and correct it. To reset the alarm, set R.ALM to YES. The alarms will be reset. Indicator light will be turned off when switched correctly. Do not reset the chiller at random without first investigating and correcting the cause(s) of the failure.

Each alarm is described by a three or four-digit code. The first one or two digits indicate the alarm source and are listed in Fig. 52. The last two digits pinpoint the problem. See Table 49.

Alarm Descriptor

Alarm Prefix

A1 – Compressor A1 Failure B1 – Compressor B1 Failure Co – Communication Failure FC – Factory Configuration Error MC – Master Chiller Configuration Error P – Process Failure

Pr – Pressure Transducer Failure Sr – Service Notification th – Thermistor Failure

Alarm Suffix

Code Number to identify source

Alarm

.01

Page 69

Table 49 — Alarm Codes

PREFIX

CODE

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network CPM — Compressor Protection Module MOP — Maximum Operating Pressure EMM — Energy Management Module MTA — Must Trip Amps EWT — Entering Water Temperature SST — Saturated Suction Temperature EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve UL — Underwriters Laboratories HPS — High Pressure Switch

SUFFIX

CODE

th 01 1 Cooler Entering Fluid

Pr 01 26 Circuit A Discharge

ALARM

NUMBER

02 2 Cooler Leaving Fluid

03 3 Circuit A Defrost Thermistor None 04 4 Circuit B Defrost Thermistor 06 5 Condenser Entering

07 6 Condenser Leaving

08 7 Reclaim Condenser

09 8 Reclaim Condenser

11 10 Master/Slave Common Fluid

12 11 Circuit A Suction Gas

13 12 Circuit B Suction Gas

15 14 Circuit A Discharge Gas

16 15 Circuit B Discharge Gas

18 17 Circuit A Condenser Sub-

19 18 Circuit B Condenser Sub-

21 19 Space Temperature

23 20 Cooler heater feedback

24 21 Circuit A Economizer Gas

25 22 Circuit B Economizer Gas

02 27 Circuit B Discharge

04 29 Circuit A Suction Transducer 05 30 Circuit B Suction Transducer 07 32 Circuit A Reclaim Pump-

08 33 Circuit B Reclaim Pump-

10 34 Circuit A Oil Pressure

11 35 Circuit B Oil Pressure

13 37 Circuit A Economizer

14 38 Circuit B Economizer

ALARM DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

Thermistor

Fluid Thermistor

Entering Thermistor

Leaving Thermistor

Thermistor

cooling Liquid Thermistor

Thermistor

thermistor

Thermistor

Transducer

down Pressure Transducer

Transducer

Pressure Transducer

LEGEND

MLV — Minimum Load Valve

Temperature measured

by the controller is

outside of the range

of –40 F to 245 F

Measured voltage is

0 vdc or SST > EWT and

EXV < 50% for 1 minute

Measured voltage is

0 vdc

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Unit be shut down or

not allowed to start

Dual chiller deactivated. Master and

slave machines

operate in stand-

alone mode

Circuit shut down or

not allowed to start

Not supported

Alarm tripped

None

Circuit economizer

function disabled

Circuit shut down or

not allowed to start

None

Circuit shut down or

not allowed to start

RESET

TYPE

Automatic Faulty Sensor,

Automatic

Automatic Faulty transducer,

Automatic

PROBABLE CAUSE

wiring error or failed

main base board

Configuration error

Faulty Sensor,

wiring error or failed

main base board

Faulty Sensor,

wiring error, failed

EXV or CPM board

Configuration error

Faulty Sensor, wiring

error, failed EMM

board

Configuration error

Faulty Sensor,

wiring error, failed

EXV board

wiring error, failed

main base board or

fan board

Configuration error

Faulty transducer, wiring error, failed

CPM board

Page 70

Table 49 — Alarm Codes (cont)

PREFIX

CODE

SUFFIX

CODE

Co A1 53 Loss of communication with

P 01 67 Cooler Freeze Protection Entering or leaving therm-

ALARM

NUMBER

B1 54 Loss of communication with

E1 56 Loss of communication with

E2 57 Loss of communication with

03 64 Loss of communication with

05 66 Loss of communication with

02 68 Condenser Freeze Protection

03 69 Condenser Freeze Protection

05 71 Circuit A Low Suction

06 72 Circuit B Low Suction

08 74 Circuit A High Suction

09 75 Circuit B High Suction

ALARM DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

Compressor Board A

Compressor Board B

EXV Board 1

EXV Board 2

Energy Management Board

AUX Board 6

Circuit A

Circuit B

Temperature

Superheat

LEGEND

MLV — Minimum Load Valve

No communication

with CPM board

No communication with

EXV board

No communication with

EMM board

No communication

with MLV/COND Board

istor sensed a tempera-

ture at or below freeze

point

— None Automatic Configuration error

Low saturated suction

temperatures detected for

a period of time

EXV>98%,

suction superheat > 30 F,

and SST<MOP for more

than 5 minutes

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Affected

compressor shut

down

Affected

compressor

shut down

Disable or not allow

EMM functions

3 step and 4-20 mA

and space tempera-

ture reset, occu-

pancy override and

ice build)

Unit shut down or

not allowed to start

Unit shut down or

not allowed to start

Circuit shut down Automatic, first

Circuit shut down Manual Faulty transducer,

RESET

TYPE

Automatic Wrong CPM address,

Automatic Wrong EXV board

Automatic Wrong board

Automatic

Automatic, first

occurrence in

24 hours;

manual if multiple alarms within 24 hours

occurrence in

24 hours;

manual if multiple alarms within 24 hours

PROBABLE CAUSE

wrong unit configura-

tion, wiring error, power

loss, failed

CPM board

address, wrong unit

configuration, wiring

error, power loss, failed EXV board

address, wrong unit

configuration, wiring

error, power loss to

module, failed module

Wrong board

address, wrong unit

configuration, wiring

error, power loss to

module, failed module

Faulty thermistor, faulty

wiring, low water flow,

low loop volume, fouled

cooler, or freeze

conditions

Faulty thermistor, faulty

wiring, low water flow,

low loop volume, fouled

cooler, or freeze

conditions

faulty wiring, faulty

thermistor, faulty EXV,

low refrigerant charge,

plugged or restricted

liquid line

Page 71

Table 49 — Alarm Codes (cont)

PREFIX

CODE

MC nn 96 Master chiller configuration

FC n0 97 No factory configuration No Configuration Unit not allowed to

SUFFIX

CODE

P 11 77 Circuit A Low Suction

P 31 99 Unit is in CCN emergency

ALARM

NUMBER

12 78 Circuit B Low Suction

14 80 Interlock Failure Lockout Switch Closed Unit shut down or

28 81 Electrical Box Thermostat

29 82 Loss of communication with

30 83 Master/Slave communication

67 84 Circuit A Low Oil Pressure Oil pressure and suction 68 85 Circuit B Low Oil Pressure

70 87 Circuit A Max Oil Filter Differ-

71 88 Circuit B Max Oil Filter Differ-

84 90 Circuit A High Oil Filter Drop

85 91 Circuit B High Oil Filter Drop

75 93 Circuit A Low Oil Level Oil level switch open Circuit shut down or 76 94 Circuit B Low Oil Level

nn 98 Illegal factory configuration

32 100 Cooler pump #1 fault Pump interlock status 33 101 Cooler pump #2 fault

15 102 Condenser Flow Switch

34 103 Circuit A Reclaim Operation

35 104 Circuit B Reclaim Operation

37 105 Circuit A — High condensing

38 106 Circuit B — High condensing

ALARM DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

Superheat

Failure/Reverse Rotation

System Manager

Failure

ential Pressure

Pressure

error Number 01 to nn

Number 01 to 04

stop

Failure

temperature out of compressor envelope

LEGEND

MLV — Minimum Load Valve

EXV<5% and either the

suction superheat is less

than the set point by at least 5 F or the suction

temperature is greater than MOP set point for

more than 5 minutes

External pump interlock

Communication between

Difference between discharge pressure and oil pressure is greater than

mand has been received

open

Loss of communication with an external control

device for more than

2 minutes

the master and slave

machines lost

pressure differential is less than the set point

50 psi for more than

30 seconds

30 psi for more than

5 minutes

Wrong or incompatible

configuration data

Wrong or incompatible

configuration data

Emergency stop com-

does not match pump

status

— None Manual Configuration error,

— None Manual Configuration error

Multiple capacity over-

rides due to high

saturated discharge

temperature

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Circuit shut down Manual Faulty transducer,

not allowed to start

Unit shut down or

not allowed to start

Unit change to

stand-alone

operation

Unit change to

stand-alone

operation

Circuit shut down Automatic, first

Circuit shut down Manual Plugged oil filter,

Alert generated Manual Plugged oil filter

not allowed to start

Unit not allowed to

start in Master-slave

control

start

Unit not allowed to

start

Unit shut down or

not allowed to start

Unit shuts down, if

available, another

pump will start

Circuit shut down Automatic Low or restricted

RESET

TYPE

Automatic Lockout Switch Closed

Automatic External pump off.

Automatic Faulty communication

occurrence in

24 hours;

manual if multiple alarms within 24 hours

Automatic, first

occurrence in

24 hours;

manual if multiple alarms within 24 hours

Automatic Configuration error

Automatic Carrier Comfort

Manual Faulty contacts, wiring

PROBABLE CAUSE

faulty wiring, faulty

thermistor, faulty EXV,

or incorrect

configuration

on EMM board

Faulty jumper wiring

when channel not used

wiring, no power

supply to the external

controller

wiring, no power or

control power to the

main base board of

either module

Plugged oil filter, faulty oil transducer, oil check valve stuck, plugged oil

strainer

closed oil valve, bad oil

solenoid, oil check

valve stuck, faulty oil

pressure transducer

Low oil level, faulty

switch, wiring error,

failed CPM board, oil

solenoid stuck open

Network® Emergency

Stop command

received

error or low control

voltage. Configuration

error.

faulty wiring or external

pump off

condenser water flow.

Fouled condenser

tubes.

Page 72

Table 49 — Alarm Codes (cont)

PREFIX

CODE

A1, B1 01 132-01,

SUFFIX

CODE

P 40 108 Circuit A — Repeated low

Sr nn 128 Service maintenance alert

ALARM

NUMBER

41 109 Circuit B — Repeated low

43 111 Low entering water tempera-

73 112 Condenser pump #1 default — None Manual Faulty contacts, wiring 74 113 Condenser pump #2 default

78 114 Circuit A High Discharge

79 115 Circuit B High Discharge

81 117 Circuit A Low Economizer

82 118 Circuit B Low Economizer

87 120 Circuit A Slide Valve Control

88 121 Circuit B Slide Valve Control

90 123 Cooler flow switch set point

91 124 Cooler flow switch failure Flow switch open Unit shut down Manual if unit

133-01

02 132-02,

03 132-03,

04 132-04,

05 132-05,

06 132-06,

07 132-07,

08 132-08,

09 132-09,

133-02

133-03

133-04

133-05

133-06

133-07

133-08

133-09

ALARM DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

suction temp overrides

ture in heating

Temperature

Pressure

Unverifiable

configuration failure

Number # nn

Compressor Motor temperature too high

Compressor Motor temperature out of range

Compressor High pressure switch protection

Compressor Over current CPM board detects high

Compressor Locked rotor CPM board detects locked

Compressor Phase loss L1 CPM board detects cur-

Compressor Phase loss L2

Compressor Phase loss L3

Compressor Low current alarm

LEGEND

MLV — Minimum Load Valve

Multiple capacity overrides due to low saturated suction temperature

Not supported — — —

Discharge gas temperature is higher than 212 F

for more than 90 seconds

The economizer pressure is below the suction pres-

sure more than 14.5 psi

for more than 10 seconds

If 100% load current is

less than 1.1 times of

30% load current, or for

1 minute when active

cooling setpoint is

greater than 32 F.

— None Manual Configuration error

Field programmed

elapsed time has expired

for maintenance time

Compressor temperature

higher than 232 F for

more than 90 seconds

Compressor temperature

reading out of the range of

–40 F to 245 F

HPS input on CPM board

motor current compared

than 65% for more than

CPM detects motor cur-

setting, compressor not

open

with MTA setting

rotor current compared

with MTA setting

rent unbalance greater

1 second

rent less than a certain

percentage of the MTA

operating

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Circuit shut down Automatic Inaccurate

Circuit shut down Manual Faulty transducer/high

Circuit shut down Manual Faulty transducer,

None Manual Slide valve stuck, inac-

None Manual Maintenance required

Circuit shut down Manual Economizer EXV fail-

Circuit shut down Manual Faulty thermistor, faulty

Circuit shut down Manual, press

Circuit shut down Manual Operating beyond

Circuit shut down Manual Compressor motor fail-

Circuit shut down Manual Blown fuse, wiring

Circuit shut down Manual Power supply discon-

RESET

TYPE

is running,

automatic otherwise

reset button on

HPS

PROBABLE CAUSE

transducer, faulty EXV, low refrigerant charge,

plugged or restricted liquid line filter drier.

error or low control

voltage. Configuration

error.

pressure switch, low/

restricted condenser

flow

faulty main base board,

faulty wiring, closed

suction service valve,

faulty EXV

curate initial current

reading

Faulty flow switch, low

cooler flow, faulty

wiring, faulty cooler

pump, faulty main base

board

ure (350,400 only),

faulty CPM board,

low refrigerant charge

wiring, faulty CPM

board

Loss of condenser air

flow, operation beyond

compressor envelope,

faulty high pressure

switch, faulty wiring,

faulty CPM board

compressor envelope, incorrect configuration

ure, unloader slide

valve failure, compres-

sor mechanical failure

error, loose terminals

nected, blown fuse,

wiring error, contact

deenergized, faulty

current toroid high

pressure switch trip.

Page 73

Table 49 — Alarm Codes (cont)

PREFIX

CODE

A1, B1 10 132-10,

SUFFIX

CODE

ALARM

NUMBER

11 132-11,

12 132-12,

13 132-13,

14 132-14,

15 132-15,

16 132-16,

17 132-17,

18 132-18,

19 132-19,

133-10

133-11

133-12

133-13

133-14

133-15

133-16

133-17

133-18

133-19

ALARM DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

Compressor Y delta starter current increase failure alarm

Compressor Contactor failure CPM board detects

Compressor Unable to stop motor

Compressor Phase reversal CPM board detects phase

Compressor MTA configuration fault

Compressor Configuration switch mismatch

Compressor Unexpected switch setting change

Compressor Power on reset CPM board detects a

Compressor UL 1998 critical section software error

Compressor UL 1998 current measure dual channel mismatch

LEGEND

MLV — Minimum Load Valve

If the delta mode current

is not 25% greater than

the current in Y mode

greater than 15% of MTA

current for 10 seconds

after shutting off the com-

pressor contactor. Oil

solenoid is energized.

CPM board detects

greater than 15% of MTA

current for 10 seconds

after three attempts

reversal from current

toroid

MTA setting is out of the

allowed MTA range

CPM board MTA setting

do not match factory

configuration

CPM board dipswitch S1

setting changed

power failure

Software error Circuit shut down Manual Electric noise, faulty

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

Circuit shut down Manual Power supply to delta

Circuit shut down Manual Faulty contactor, con-

Circuit shut down Manual Faulty contactor,

Circuit shut down Manual Terminal block power

Circuit shut down Manual Incorrect MTA setting,

Circuit shut down Manual Incorrect CPM dip-

Circuit shut down Manual Power supply

RESET

TYPE

PROBABLE CAUSE

contactor not

connected, faulty delta

contactor or wiring,

faulty CPM board

tactor welded, wiring

error

contactor welded,

wiring error

supply lead not in

correct phase. Power

supply leads going

through toroid crossed

faulty CPM board

switch setting,

incorrect factory MTA

setting, faulty CPM

board

switch setting, faulty

CPM board

interruption

CPM board

DIAGNOSTIC ALARM CODES AND POSSIBLE CAUSES

Thermistor Failure Alarm 1 — Cooler Fluid Entering (th.01)

Alarm 2 — Cooler Fluid Leaving (th.02) Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is tested whether the

unit is on or off if the temperature as measured by the thermistor is outside of the range –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118.3 C).

Action to be Taken — The unit shuts down normally, or is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is within the expected range.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to the Main Base Board

• sensor accuracy See the Thermistors section on page 56 for thermistor de-

scription, identifiers and connections.

Defrost Thermistor Failure Alarm 3 — Circuit A (th.03)

Alarm 4 — Circuit B (th.04) NOTE: Alarms 3 and 4 are not used or supported. If this condi-

tion is encountered, confirm machine configuration. Thermistor Failure Alarm 5 — Condenser Entering Fluid (th.06) Alarm 6 — Condenser Leaving Fluid (th.07) NOTE: Alarms 5 and 6 are not used or supported. If this condi-

tion is encountered, confirm machine configuration. Condenser Reclaim Thermistor Alarm 7— Reclaim Entering Fluid (th.08) Alarm 8 — Reclaim Leaving Fluid (th.09) NOTE: Alarms 7 and 8 are not used or supported. If this condi-

tion is encountered, confirm machine configuration.

Page 74

Alarm 10 — Master/Slave Common Fluid Thermistor (th.11)

Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. The alarm will be tripped if the unit is configured as a master or a slave (Master/Slave Select,

MSSL), leaving temperature control is selected (Entering Fluid Control, EWTO), and if the temperature measured by

the CHWS (chilled water sensor) fluid sensor is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118.3 C).

Action to be Taken — Master/slave operation is disabled and the chiller returns to stand alone mode.

Reset Method — Reset is automatic when the thermistor reading is inside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118.3 C).

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to the Main Base Board

• a faulty thermistor See the Thermistors section on page 56 for thermistor de-

scription, identifiers and connections. Suction Gas Thermistor Alarm 11 — Circuit A (th.12)

Alarm 12 — Circuit B (th.13) Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is tested whether the

unit is ON or OFF. If the suction gas temperature as measured by the thermistor is outside of the range –40 to 245 F (–40 to

118.3 C).

Action to be Taken — The affected circuit shuts down normally.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the thermistor reading is within the expected range. The affected circuit will restart once the alarm has cleared.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to the EXV board

• board for a faulty channel

• a faulty thermistor See the Thermistors section on page 56 for thermistor de-

scription, identifiers and connections. Circuit Discharge Gas Thermistor Sensor Failure Alarm 14 — Circuit A (th.15)

Alarm 15 — Circuit B (th.16) Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is tested whether the

unit is ON or OFF. The alarm is tripped if the temperature measured by the Outdoor Air Thermistor sensor is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118.3 C).

Action to be Taken — The unit shuts down normally, or is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is within the expected range.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to the CPM board

• a faulty thermistor

• a faulty channel on the board

See the Thermistors section on page 56 for thermistor description, identifiers and connections.

Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor

Alarm 17 — Circuit A (th.18)

Alarm 18 — Circuit B (th.19) NOTE: Alarms 17 and 18 are not used or supported. If this

condition is encountered, confirm machine configuration.

Alarm 19 — Space Temperature Sensor Failure (th.21) Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is checked whether the

unit is ON or OFF and if Space Temperature Reset has been enabled. This alarm is generated if the outdoor-air temperature as measured by the thermistor is outside of the range –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118.3 C).

Action to be Taken — Unit operates under normal control. Temperature Reset based on Space Temperature is disabled.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the thermistor reading is within the expected range. The Space Temperature Reset will resume once the alarm has cleared.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to the Energy Management Module

• board for a faulty channel

• a faulty thermistor For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see

the Thermistors section. Alarm 20 — Cooler Heater Feedback Sensor Thermistor

(th.23) NOTE: Alarm 20 is not used or supported. If this condition is

encountered, confirm machine configuration. Economizer Gas Thermistor Alarm 21 — Circuit A (th.24)

Alarm 22 — Circuit B (th.25) Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is tested whether the

unit is ON or OFF. The alarm is tripped if the Economizer gas reading is outside the range of –40 to 245 F (–40 to 118.3 C).

Action to be Taken — The unit shuts down normally, or is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, the alarm will reset once the thermistor reading is within the expected range.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to the EXV board

• a faulty thermistor

• a faulty channel on the board

See the Thermistors section on page 56 for thermistor description, identifiers and connections.

Discharge Transducer Alarm 26 — Circuit A (Pr.01)

Alarm 27 — Circuit B (Pr.02) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the circuit is

ON or OFF. This alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the MBB or Fan Board C (FBC) is 0 vdc, which corresponds to the Navigator™ display of –7 psi (–48.3 kPa).

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down normally, or not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the transducer voltage is greater than 0 vdc, which corresponds to the Navigator display of a value greater than –7 psi (–48.3 kPa).

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to Main Base Board (Alarms 24 and 25)

• sensor wiring to Fan Board C (Alarm 26)

• board for a faulty channel

• for a faulty transducer

• confirm unit configuration

Suction Pressure Transducer Failure Alarm 29 — Circuit A (Pr.04)

Alarm 30 — Circuit B (Pr.05)

Page 75

Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON or OFF. The alarm is generated if one of the following criteria is met:

1. If the voltage as sensed by the MBB is 0 vdc, which corresponds to the Navigator™ display of –7 psi (–48.3 kPa).

2. The circuit is ON in cooling mode and the Saturated Suction Temperature (Saturated Suction Temp, SST) for the circuit is greater than the Entering Water Temperature and EXV opening is less than 50% for more than 60 seconds.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down immediately, or not allowed to start.

Reset Method

1. Automatic, once the transducer voltage is greater than 0 vdc, which corresponds to the Navigator display of a value greater than –7 psi (–48.3 kPa).

2. Automatic once the circuit’s saturated suction temperature is lower than the Entering Water Temperature by 3° F (1.6° C). If this criterion trips the alarm 3 times within a 24-hour period, the alarm changes to a manual reset.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to Main Base Board

• board for a faulty channel

• faulty transducer

• faulty entering water temperature sensor Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Alarm 32 — Circuit A (Pr.07)

Alarm 33 — Circuit B (Pr.08) NOTE: Alarms 30 and 31 are not used or supported. If this

condition is encountered, confirm machine configuration. Oil Pressure Transducer Alarm 34 — Circuit A (Pr.10)

Alarm 35 — Circuit B (Pr.11) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the circuit is

ON or OFF. The alarm is generated if one of the following criteria is met:

1. If the voltage as sensed by the CPM board is 0 vdc, which corresponds to the Navigator display of –7 psi (–48.3 kPa).

2. The circuit is OFF and outside air temperature is below

35.6 F (2 C).

3. The circuit is OFF and the fluid type is brine.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down immediately, or not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the transducer voltage is greater than 0 vdc.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to CPM board

• board for a faulty channel

• faulty transducer

• plugged oil filter

• faulty oil solenoid valve coil

• stuck oil solenoid valve

• confirm unit configuration

Economizer Pressure Transducer Failure (sizes 175,200,350,400 only)

Alarm 37 — Circuit A (Pr. 13) Alarm 38 — Circuit B (Pr. 14)

Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the circuit is ON or OFF. The alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the MBB or Fan Board C is 0 vdc, which corresponds to the Navigator display of –7 psi (–48.3 kPa).

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down immediately, or not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the transducer voltage is greater than 0 vdc, which corresponds to the Navigator display of a value greater than –7 psi (–48.3 kPa).

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to EXV Board

• EXV board for a faulty channel

• faulty transducer

• faulty economizer EXV or EXV wiring

• faulty economizer EXV channel on the board

• closed or partially closed suction service valve

• confirm unit configuration Loss of Communication with Compressor Board

Alarm 53 — Compressor Board A (Co.A1) Alarm 54 — Compressor Board B (Co.B1) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. If communication with the Compressor Protection Module Board (CPM) is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be generated.

Action to be Taken — The affected compressor will be shut down.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established. If called for, the compressor will start normally.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• power supply to the affected CPM board

• address of the CPM

• local equipment network (LEN) wiring

• confirm unit configuration Loss of Communication with EXV Board Alarm 56 — Circuit A, EXV Board 1 (Co.E1)

Alarm 57 — Circuit B, EXV Board 2 (Co.E2) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is tested whether the

unit is ON or OFF. If communication with EXV1 or 2 is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered.

Action to be Taken — If running, Circuit A or B will shut down normally. If Circuit A or B is not operating, it will not be allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established, the unit will start normally.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• power supply to EXV1 or 2

• address of the EXV board

• local equipment network (LEN) wiring

• confirm unit configuration

Page 76

Alarm 64 — Loss of Communication with Energy Management Module Board (Co.03)

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF and when a function that requires the Energy Management Module (EMM) is configured. If communication with the EMM is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered.

Action to be Taken — If any function controlled by the EMM (3-Step and 4-20 mA Demand Limit, 4-20 mA and Space Temperature Reset, Occupancy Override, and Ice Build) is active, that function will be terminated. If an EMM function is programmed, and communication is lost, the function will not be allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established, the functions will be enabled.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• The EMM is installed, (EMM NRCP2 Board, EMM). If EMM NRCP2 Board, EMM=YES, then check for a con- trol option that requires the EMM that may be enabled (correct configuration if not correct).

• power supply to EMM

• address of the EMM

• local equipment network (LEN) wiring

• confirm unit configuration to be sure that no options that require the EMM are enabled

Alarm 66 — Loss of Communication with AUX Board 6 (Co.05)

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criteria are checked whether the unit is ON or OFF. If units are configured for minimum load control or head pressure control (Hot Gas Bypass Select, HGBP=Yes or Condenser Valve Select, CON.V=Yes). If communication with the AUX board is lost then the alarm will be generated.

Action to be Taken — Unit shut down or not allowed to start. Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established,

the unit will start normally. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• power supply to the MLV/COND board

• address of the MLV/COND board

• local equipment network (LEN) wiring

• confirm network configuration

Alarm 67 — Cooler Freeze Protection (P.01) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criteria are checked whether the

unit is ON or OFF. If the entering or leaving water thermistor senses a temperature at the freeze point or less, the alarm will be generated. For a fresh water system (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD=1), the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C). For medium temperature brine systems (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD=2), the freeze point is Brine Freeze Set Point (Brine Freeze Setpoint, LOSP).

Action to be Taken — Unit shut down or not allowed to start. Chilled water pump will be started.

Reset Method — Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours if LWT rises to 6° F (3° C) above set point. Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• entering and leaving fluid thermistors for accuracy

•water flow rate

• loop volume — low loop volume at nominal flow rates can in extreme cases bypass cold water to the cooler

• freezing conditions

• freeze protection items for proper operation

• glycol concentration and adjust LOSP accordingly

• If the Leaving Water Set Point is above 40 F (4.4 C) and there is glycol in the loop, consider using the Medium Temperature Brine option (Cooler Fluid Type, FLUD=2) to utilize the brine freeze point instead of 34 F (1.1 C)

Condenser Freeze Protection Alarm 68 — Circuit A (P.02)

Alarm 69 — Circuit B (P.03) NOTE: Alarms 53-55 are not used or supported. If this condi-

tion is encountered, confirm machine configuration. Low Saturated Suction Temperature Alarm 71 — Circuit A (P.05)

Alarm 72 — Circuit B (P.06) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested only when the

circuit is ON. This alarm is generated if one of the following criteria is met:

• If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below –13 F (–25 C) for more than 30 seconds or 40 seconds if OAT is less than 14 F (–10 C) or LWT is less than 36 F (2.2 C).

• If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below –22 F (–30 C) for more than 10 seconds, or 20 seconds if OAT less than 50 F (10 C).

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down immediately.

Prior to the alarm trip, the control will take action to avoid

the alarm. See Operating Modes 21 and 22 on page 54. Reset Method — Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours.

Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• sensor wiring to Main Base Board

• board for a faulty channel

• faulty suction transducer

• cooler water flow

• loop volume

• EXV operation

• liquid line refrigerant restriction, filter drier, service valve, etc

• refrigerant charge

High Suction Superheat Alarm 74 — Circuit A (P.08)

Alarm 75 — Circuit B (P.09) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested only when the cir-

cuit is ON. This alarm is generated if all of the following criteria are met:

• The EXV position is equal to or greater than 98%.

• The circuit’s Suction Superheat (Suction Gas Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) is greater than the superheat control set point.

• The circuit’s Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) set point (EXV MOP Setpoint, MOP) for more than 5 minutes.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down normally. Reset Method — Manual. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• suction pressure transducer wiring to Main Base Board

• board for a faulty channel

• a faulty suction transducer

• suction gas thermistor wiring to EXV Board 1 or to EXV Board 2

• suction gas thermistor sensor for accuracy

• for EXV Board 1 or EXV Board 2 faulty channel

• EXV operation

Page 77

• a liquid line refrigerant restriction, filter drier, service valve, etc.

• refrigerant charge

Low Suction Superheat Alarm 77 — Circuit A (P.11)

Alarm 78 — Circuit B (P.12) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested when the circuit is

ON. This alarm is generated if the following criterion is met:

The EXV position is equal to or less than 5% and the cir-

cuit’s Suction Superheat (Suction Gas Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) is less than the Suction Superheat Set Point (EXVA Superheat Setpoint, SHP.A, EXVB Superheat Setpoint, SHP.B, or EXVC Superheat Setpoint, SHP.C) by at least 5° F (2.8° C) or the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is greater than Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) set point (EXV MOP Setpoint, MOP) for more than 5 minutes.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down normally. Reset Method — Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours.

Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• suction pressure transducer wiring to Main Base Board

• board for a faulty channel

• faulty suction transducer

• suction gas thermistor wiring to EXV Board 1 or to EXV Board 2

• suction gas thermistor sensor for accuracy

• EXV Board 1 or EXV Board 2 faulty channel

• EXV operation

• confirm maximum operating pressure set point

• refrigerant charge level

Alarm 80 — Interlock Failure (P.14) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. This alarm is generated if the lockout switch (located in the Energy Management Module) is closed during normal operation.

Action to be Taken — All compressors are shut down immediately without going through pumpdown. and is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours. Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• chilled water flow switch operation

• water flow. Be sure all water isolation valves are open and check water strainer for a restriction

• interlock wiring circuit

• power supply to the pump

• control signal to the pump controller

• chilled water pump operation

• cooler pump contactor for proper operation

Alarm 81 — Electrical Box Thermostat Failure/Reverse Rotation (P.28)

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criteria are checked whether the unit is ON or OFF. If channel 15A on the MBB, which is used for field wired external pump interlock, is open then the alarm will be generated.

Action to be Taken — Unit shut down or note allowed to start. Reset Method — Automatic, if the channel is closed, the unit

will start normally. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• jumper wiring on TB5-1 and TB5-2 when channel is not in use

• external pump interlock open

• field wiring for the external pump interlock open

Alarm 82 — Loss of Communication with System Manager (P.29)

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is ON or OFF. This alarm is generated if the System Manager had established communications with the machine and is then lost for more than 2 minutes.

Action to be Taken — The action to be taken by the control depends on the configuration. If Auto Start when SM lost is enabled, (Cooler Heater Delta Spt, AU.SM=YES), then the unit will force the CCN Chiller Start Stop to ENBL and clear all forced points from the System Manager. The unit will revert to stand-alone operation.

Reset Method — Automatic, once communication is re-established.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• communication wiring

• power supply to the System Manager and unit controls Alarm 83 — Master/Slave Communication Failure (P.30) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the units are

ON or OFF and a master and slave machine has been configured, (Master/Slave Select, MSSL=1 and Master/Slave Select, MSSL=2). If communication is lost for more than 3 minutes, this alarm is generated.

Action to be Taken — Dual chiller control will be disabled and each unit will operate in Stand-Alone mode.

Reset Method — Automatic, once communication is re-established.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• CCN wiring

• control power to each Main Base Board, master and slave

• confirm correct configuration Low Oil Pressure Alarm 84 — Circuit A (P.67)

Alarm 85 — Circuit B (P.68) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested only when the com-

pressor is ON. The alarm is generated if one of the following occurs, where:

oil = oil pressure transducer reading for the appropriate compressor

sp = suction pressure reading for the affected circuit dp = discharge pressure reading for the affected circuit

oil_sp1 = 0.7 x (dp-sp) + sp oil_sp2 = sp + 7.2 psi (15 seconds after start) oil_sp2 = sp + 14.5 psi (45 seconds after start)

• If the compressor starts with the ambient temperature (OAT less than 36° F [2° C] the oil pressure monitoring is delayed by 30 seconds.

Action to be Taken — The affected compressor will be stopped. The other compressors will continue to operate.

Reset Method — Manual. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• sensor wiring to the CPM Board

• board for a faulty channel

• faulty transducer

• plugged oil filter

• faulty oil solenoid valve coil

• stuck oil solenoid valve

• stuck check valve

• manual shut off valve to ensure it is not fully open

• confirm unit configuration

Page 78

Max Oil Filter Differential Pressure Failure Alarm 87 — Circuit A (P.70)

Alarm 88 — Circuit B (P.71) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested when the compres-

sor has been operating for at least 5 seconds. The alarm is generated if the difference between the Circuit Discharge Pressure and the Compressor Oil Pressure is greater than 50 psi (345 kPa) for more than 30 seconds.

Action to be Taken — The affected compressor will be turned off.

Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• check the discharge and oil sensor wiring to the Main Base Board and CPM board

• boards for a faulty channel

• faulty transducer

• plugged oil filter

• faulty oil solenoid valve coil

• stuck oil solenoid valve

• stuck check valve

• manual shut off valve to ensure it is not fully open

Check the power supply to the System Manager and unit controls.

High Oil Filter Pressure Drop Alarm 90 — Circuit A (P.84)

Alarm 91 — Circuit B (P.85) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested when the compres-

sor has been operating for at least 5 seconds. The alarm is generated if the difference between the Circuit Discharge Pressure and the Compressor Oil Pressure is greater than 30 psi for more than 5 minutes.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will continue to run. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• discharge and oil sensor wiring to the Main Base Board and CPM board

• boards for a faulty channel

• faulty transducer

• plugged oil filter

• faulty oil solenoid valve coil

• stuck oil solenoid valve

• stuck check valve

• manual shut off valve to ensure it is not fully open

Check the power supply to the System Manager and unit controls.

Low Oil Level Failure Alarm 93 — Circuit A (P.75)

Alarm 94 — Circuit B (P.76) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the com-

pressor is on or off. The alarm is generated if:

• The compressor is not running and an increase in capacity is required and the compressor is not started.

• The compressor is running and the oil level switch is open for more than 45 seconds.

Action to be Taken — The affected compressor will be turned off.

Reset Method — Automatic, when the oil level is elevated, first three times the alarm is tripped in a 24-hour period. Manual if alarm is tripped more than three times in a 24-hour period.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• oil level in the oil separator

• oil level switch wiring to the CPM board

• CPM board for a faulty channel

• faulty oil level switch

• oil solenoid valve stuck open Alarm 96 — Master Chiller Configuration Error (MC.nn) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. The units must be configured as a Master and Slave machine (Master/Slave Select, MSSL=1 and Master/ Slave Select, MSSL=2), and one of the following configura- tion errors has been found. The “nn” refers to the error code listed in Table 50.

Action to be Taken — Unit not allowed to start in Master Slave control.

Reset Method — Automatic Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following:

• CCN wiring.

• Control power to each Main Base Board, master and slave.

• Move to first position.

• Confirm unit configuration. Alarm 97 — Initial Factory Configuration Required (FC.n0) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. The alarm will be generated if the Unit Capacity Model, TONS=0.

Action to be Taken — The unit is not allowed to start. Reset Method — Automatic after factory configuration is com-

plete. The configuration must be manually completed. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

the unit configuration. Alarm 98 — Illegal Configuration (FC.nn) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. The alarm will be generated if the one of the following configuration errors is detected by the control. The “nn” refers to the error code listed in Table 51.

Action to be Taken — The unit is not allowed to start. Reset Method — Automatic after reconfiguration is completed. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

the unit configuration (None, UNIT). Alarm 99 — Unit is in Emergency Stop (P.31) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the units are

ON or OFF and when the machine receives a Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN) command for an Emergency Stop.

Action to be Taken — Unit will stop, or will not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, once a return to normal command is received.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check for CCN Emergency Stop command.

Page 79

Table 50 — Master/Slave Alarm Code

ERROR

CODE

LEGEND

EWT — Entering Water Temperature LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

MASTER SLAVE DESCRIPTION

01 XX

02 X Master and slave units have the same network address. 03 X There is no slave configured at the slave address 04 XSlave pump_seq incorrect configuration

05 X

06 X

07 X

08 X

09 X X The slave chiller is in local or remote control (chilstat = 3) 10 X X The slave chiller is down due to fault (chilstat = 5) 11 X The master chiller operating type is not Master: master_oper_typ 12 X X No communication with slave. 13 X Master and slave heat cool status are not the same.

The master or slave water pump is not configured while the control of the lag unit pump is required (lag_pump = 1)

There is a conflict between the master and the slave LWT option: the master is configured for EWT control while the slave is configured for LWT control.

There is a conflict between the master and the slave LWT option: the master is configured for LWT control while the slave is configured for EWT control.

There is a conflict between the master and the slave pump option: the master is configured for lag pump control while the slave is not configured for lag pump control.

There is a conflict between the master and the slave pump option: the master is not configured for lag pump control while the slave is configured for lag pump control.

Table 51 — Illegal Configuration Alarm Code

ERROR

CODE

01 Unit size is unknown. 02 Reclaim option selected for Heat Pump machine. 03 Hot Gas Bypass configured for a Heat Pump machine.

DESCRIPTION

Cooler Pump Fault Alarm 100 — Pump 1 Fault (P.32)

Alarm 101 — Pump 2 Fault (P.33) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the units are

ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the cooler pump interlock opens. When starting the pump, the control must read an open circuit for 3 consecutive reads. If the pump is operating and the circuit opens, the alarm will be generated immediately.

Action to be Taken — The pump and machine will be shut down. If there is another pump available, the control will start that pump, restart the machine and clear the alarm. If no other pump is available, the unit will remain OFF.

Reset Method — Manual. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• interlock wiring circuit

• control signal to the pump controller

• cooler pump contactor for proper operation

• control voltage for proper voltage (on 208-volt systems, be sure the proper tap on TRAN1 is utilized)

Alarm 102 — Condenser Flow Switch Failure (P.15) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. This alarm is generated if the lockout switch (located in the Energy Management Module) is closed during normal operation.

Action to be Taken — All compressors are shut down immediately without going through pumpdown, and unit is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours. Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• chilled water flow switch operation

• water flow. Be sure all water isolation valves are open and check water strainer for a restriction

• interlock wiring circuit

• power supply to the pump

• control signal to the pump controller

• condenser water pump operation

• condenser pump contactor for proper operation

Reclaim Operation Failure Alarm 103 — Circuit A (P.34)

Alarm 104 — Circuit B (P.35) NOTE: Alarms 103 and 104 are not used or supported. If this

condition is encountered, confirm machine configuration. High Condensing Temperature — Out of Compressor

Envelope Alarm 105 — Circuit A (P.37)

Alarm 106 — Circuit B (P.38) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested when the circuit is

ON. This alarm will be tripped if the circuit capacity is reduced more than 8 times in 30 minutes due to high discharge gas temperatures. If no override occurs in a 30-minute period, the counter is reset.

Action to be Taken — The affected circuit will be shut down. Reset Method — Automatic, after 30 minutes. If the alarm is

cleared via the Manual method, the counter will be reset to zero.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• Maximum Condensing Temperature (MCT) for the proper setting

• noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit

• low condenser water flow

• refrigerant charge (overcharged)

• condenser tubes fouled

• discharge service valve to be sure that it is open. Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy

• unit configuration

Page 80

Repeated Low Suction Temperature Protection Alarm 108 — Circuit A (P.40)

Alarm 109 — Circuit B (P.41) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested when the circuit is

ON. If the circuit operates and if more than 8 successive circuit capacity decreases (stop the compressor) have occurred because of low suction temperature protection overrides, the circuit alarm will be tripped. If no override has occurred for more than 30 minutes, the override counter will be reset to zero.

Action to be Taken — ALARM_LED will be set to blinking. Alert relay will be energized.

Reset Method — Automatic, when the override counter returns to zero. If the alarm is cleared via the Manual method, the counter will be forced to zero.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the following items:

• suction transducer for accuracy

• suction transducer wiring

• EXV operation

• refrigerant charge (undercharged)

• evaporator loop for low water flow

• evaporator leaving water temperature

• suction service valve to be sure it is open. Discharge pressure transducer for accuracy

• unit configuration

Alarm 111 — Low Entering Water Temperature in Heating (P.43)

NOTE: Alarm 111 is not used or supported. If this condition is encountered, confirm machine configuration.

Condenser Default Alarm 112 — Pump 1 (P.73)

Alarm 113 — Pump 2 (P.74) NOTE: Alarms 112 and 113 are not used or supported. If this

condition is encountered, confirm machine configuration. High Discharge Temperature Alarm 114 — Circuit A (P.78)

Alarm 115 — Circuit B (P.79) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested when the compressor

is operating. This alarm will be tripped if the discharge gas temperature is higher than 212 F (100 C) for more than 90 seconds.

Action to be Taken — The affected compressor will be stopped.

Reset Method — Manual. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Maximum Condensing Temperature (MCT) for the proper setting

• noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit

• refrigerant charge (overcharged)

• condenser tubes fouled

• the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open, check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy

• unit configuration

Low Economizer Pressure Alarm 117 — Circuit A (P.81)

Alarm 118 — Circuit B (P.82) Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested when the compres-

sor is operating to prevent pumpdown conditions when the suction service valve is closed. This alarm will be tripped if the economizer pressure is below the suction pressure more than 1 bar (14.5 psi) for more than 10 seconds.

Action to be Taken — The affected compressor will be stopped.

Reset Method — Manual.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• suction service valve is closed

• sensor wiring to the EXV boards

• boards for faulty channels

• faulty transducer

• economizer EXV operation Slide Valve Control Unverifiable Alarm 120 — Circuit A (P.87)

Alarm 121 — Circuit B (P.88) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested when the compres-

sor is operating and the active cooling set point is greater than 32° F (0° C). This alarm will be tripped if:

• The circuit is operating at 100% of capacity and the measured current is less than 1.1 times the current at fully unloaded 30% for more than one minute.

Action to be Taken — The affected compressor will continue to run.

Reset Method — Manual. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• faulty unloader solenoid valves

• faulty unloader solenoid coils

• wiring of the unloader solenoid valves

• CPM board for faulty channels

• current transformer reading for accuracy

Alarm 123 — Cooler Flow Switch Setpoint Configuration Failure (P.90)

NOTE: Alarm 123 is not used or supported. If this condition is encountered, confirm machine configuration.

Alarm 124 — Cooler Flow Switch Failure (P.91) Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested when the unit is on

or off. This alarm will be tripped when the unit is on if:

• The flow switch fails to close after the Off/On delay.

• If the master/slave control is active, the unit is the lag chiller and if the cooler flow switch fails to close within one minute after the cooler pump was restarted. The alarm is ignored if the lag cooler pump is stopped as a result of master/slave control.

• The flow switch is opened during normal operation.

The alarm will be tripped when the unit is off if:

• The cooler pump control is enabled (Cooler Pumps Sequence, PUMP=0) when the pump is enabled (Flow Checked if C Pump Off, P. L O C ) and the cooler flow switch is closed after the cooler pump is commended OFF for more than 2 minutes.

• The flow switch fails to close after the Off/On delay after the cooler pump has been turned on to protect the cooler from freezing (Cooler Pumps Sequence, PUMP=0).

Action to be Taken — For criteria for trip A1 and A2, the compressors will not be started.

For criteria for trip A3, all compressors will be stopped without going through pumpdown. Cooler pump will be stopped with no delay.

For criteria for trip B1, the unit will not start. Reset Method — Manual if at least one compressor is operat-

ing. Automatic if no compressors are operating. Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• a faulty flow switch

• flow switch wiring

• Main Base Board for a faulty channel

Alarm 128 — Service Maintenance Alert (Sr.nn) Criteria for Trip — This alert is tested whether the unit is ON

or OFF and when the Servicing Alert decisions listed under Time Clock MCFG have been enabled. The alarm will be



and the cooler flow switch is checked

Page 81

generated if the one of the following configuration errors is detected by the control. The “nn” refers to the error code listed in Table 52.

Table 52 — Service Maintenance Alert Codes

CODE DESCRIPTION

Sr.01 Circuit A Loss of Refrigerant Charge Sr.02 Circuit B Loss of Refrigerant Charge Sr.04 Water Loop Size Warning Sr.05 Air Exchanger Cleanliness Warning Sr.06 Cooler Pump 1 Servicing Required Sr.07 Cooler Pump 2 Servicing Required Sr.08 Condenser Pump 1 Servicing Required Sr.09 Condenser Pump 2 Servicing Required Sr.10 Water Filter Servicing Required Sr.11 Compressor A Oil Filter Servicing Required Sr.12 Compressor B Oil Filter Servicing Required

Action to be Taken — None. Reset Method — Manual, after the service has been completed. Possible Causes — If the Sr-01, 02, or 03 conditions are

encountered, check the following items:

• sensor wiring to the Main Base Board

• sensor for accuracy Compressor Motor Temperature Too High Alarm 132-01 — Circuit A (A1.01)

Alarm 133-01 — Circuit B (B1.01) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criteria are checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if:

• The temperature is greater than 245 F (118 C) and it has been greater than 212 F (100 C) for 10 consecutive seconds.

• The compressor temperature is greater than 232 F (111 C) for 90 seconds (but less than 250 F [120 C]).

Action to be Taken — The circuit shuts down immediately. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• faulty wiring and loose plugs

• faulty CPM board

Compressor Motor Temperature Out of Range

Alarm 132-02 — Circuit A (A1.02)

Alarm 133-02 — Circuit B (B1.02) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if: the temperature is greater than 245 F (118 C) and it has NOT been greater than 212 F (100 C) for 10 consecutive seconds.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• faulty compressor temperature thermistor

• faulty wiring and loose plugs

• faulty CPM board

Compressor High Pressure Switch Protection Alarm 132-03 — Circuit A (A1.03)

Alarm 133-03 — Circuit B (B1.03) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if the circuit high-pressure switch (HPS) opens for more than 2 seconds. The CPM board monitors the HPS switch.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual (reset button on switch)

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• loss of condenser water flow

• condenser pump failure

• compressor operating beyond the operation envelope

• faulty high pressure switch or wiring

• faulty CPM board Compressor Overcurrent Alarm 132-04 — Circuit A (A1.04)

Alarm 133-04 — Circuit B (B1.04) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if the CPM board detects a motor current greater than 93% MTA (must trip amps) and less than 2 times that for more than 1.7 seconds.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Compressor operating beyond the operation envelope.

• Incorrect MTA setting. Compressor Locked Rotor Alarm 132-05 — Circuit A (A1.05)

Alarm 133-05 — Circuit B (B1.05) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked during

start-up when the compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if the CPM board detects a high motor current compared with the MTA (must trip amps) setting for more than 450 ms.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• compressor mechanical failure

• unloader slide valve failure

• compressor motor failure Compressor Phase Loss Alarm 132-06 — Circuit A L1 (A1.06)

Alarm 133-06 — Circuit B L1 (B1.06) Alarm 132-07 — Circuit A L2 (A1.07) Alarm 133-07 — Circuit B L2 (B1.07) Alarm 132-08 — Circuit A L3 (A1.08) Alarm 133-08 — Circuit B L3 (B1.08)

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criteria are checked during startup when the compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if:

• The current unbalance on any of the 3 phases is greater than 48% for more than 1 second continuously during start-up.

• The current unbalance on any of the 3 phases is greater than 48% for more than 2 seconds continuously during runtime.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• power failure

• blown fuse or tripped circuit breaker

• power wiring errors or loose terminals

Compressor Low Current Alarm 132-09 — Circuit A (A1.09)

Alarm 133-09 — Circuit B (B1.09) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criteria are checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if:

• The current is less than 15% MTA on all three legs for more than 1 second for Wye-Delta start units.

• If the current is less than 15% of MTA on all three legs for more than 1 second for direct start units.

Page 82

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• power failure

• blown fuse or tripped circuit breaker

• deenergized contactor

• faulty current toroid

• high pressure switch (HPS) trip (when auto reset HPS is used)

Compressor Wye-Delta Starter Current Increase Failure Alarm 132-10 — Circuit A (A1.10)

Alarm 133-10 — Circuit B (B1.10) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked during

compressor start-up. This alarm will be generated if the current in Delta mode is not more than 25% greater than the current in Y mode within 550 ms.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• power supply failure to the delta contactor

• faulty wiring to the delta contactor

• faulty CPM board

• faulty current toroid

Compressor Contactor Failure Alarm 132-11 — Circuit A (A1.11)

Alarm 133-11 — Circuit B (B1.11) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked during

compressor shut-down. This alarm will be generated if the current is greater than 15% of the MTA on at least one phase for 10 continuous seconds.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• faulty or welded contactor

• faulty wiring

• faulty CPM board

Compressor Unable to Stop Motor Alarm 132-12 — Circuit A (A1.12)

Alarm 133-12 — Circuit B (B1.12) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked during

compressor shut-down. This alarm will be generated if after three attempts to turn off the compressor outputs and the current is still greater than 15% of the MTA on at least one phase for 10 continuous seconds.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• faulty or welded contactor

• faulty wiring

Compressor Phase Reversal Alarm 132-13 — Circuit A (A1.13)

Alarm 133-13 — Circuit B (B1.13) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked during

compressor start-up. This alarm will be generated if the CPM board detects a phase reversal from the current toroid.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• if power supply lead at the terminal block is not operating at the correct phase

• if power supply is crossed when going through the current toroid

Compressor MTA Configuration Fault Alarm 132-14 — Circuit A (A1.14)

Alarm 133-14 — Circuit B (B1.14) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked whether the

compressor is ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the MTA setting is out of the allowed MTA range.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• incorrect MTA settings

• faulty CPM board

Compressor Configuration Switch Mismatch Alarm 132-15 — Circuit A (A1.15)

Alarm 133-15 — Circuit B (B1.15) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked whether the

compressor is ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the CPM board S1 and S2 setting does not match software configuration.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• incorrect CPM board settings

• faulty CPM board

Compressor Unexpected Switch Setting Change Alarm 132-16 — Circuit A (A1.16)

Alarm 133-16 — Circuit B (B1.16) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if the CPM board S1 setting has changed.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• incorrect CPM board settings

• faulty CPM board

Compressor Power on Reset Alarm 132-17 — Circuit A (A1.17)

Alarm 133-17 — Circuit B (B1.17) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if the CPM board detects a power failure.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check for

power interruptions. Compressor UL 1998 Critical Section Software Error Alarm 132-18 — Circuit A (A1.18)

Alarm 133-18 — Circuit B (B1.18) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if the CPM board detects a software error.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual

Page 83

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

ENTER

following items:

• electrical noise

• faulty CPM board Compressor UL 1998 Current Measure Dual Channel Mismatch Alarm 132-19 — Circuit A (A1.19)

Alarm 133-19 — Circuit B (B1.19) Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked when the

compressor is ON. This alarm will be generated if the CPM board detects a software error.

Action to be Taken — The compressor will be stopped. Reset Method — Manual Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• electrical noise

• faulty CPM board

Service Test — Main power and control circuit power

must be on for Service Test.

The Service Test function is used to verify proper operation of various devices within the chiller, such as compressors, minimum load valve solenoid (if installed), cooler pump(s) and remote alarm relay. This is helpful during the start-up procedure to determine if devices are installed correctly. See Fig. 53 for 30XW wiring diagram.

SERVICE TEST WITH NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY — To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Use the display keys to move to the Service Test mode. The items are described in the Service Test table. There are two sub-modes available. Service Tes t En a bl e, T.REQ allows for manual control of the compres- sors and minimum load control. In this mode the compressors will operate only on command. The capacity control, head pressure control, and EXV control algorithms will be active. There must be a load on the chiller to operate for an extended period of time. All circuit safeties will be honored during the test. Quick Test Enable, Q.REQ allows for test of EXVs, pumps, oil solenoids, unloader solenoids and status points (alarm relays, running status and chiller capacity). If there are no keys pressed for 5 minutes, the active test mode will be disabled.

To enter the Manual Control mode with the Navigator™ display, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Move the LED to the Service Test mode. Press

to access TEST. Press to access T.REQ.

Press and the display will show OFF. Press

and OFF will flash. Enter the password if required. Use either arrow key to change the T.R E Q value to ON and press . Place the Enable/Off/Remote Switch in the enable position. Manual Control mode is now active. Press the arrow keys to move to the appropriate item. To activate an item locate the item, press and the display will show OFF. Press and OFF will flash. Use either arrow key to change the value to ON and press . The item should be active. To turn the item off, locate the item, press and the display will show ON. The chiller must be enabled by

turning the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to Enable. Press

and ON will flash. Use either arrow key to change the value to OFF and press . The item should be inactive.

To enter the Quick Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Move the LED to the Service Test mode. Press to access TEST. Use the key until the display reads QUIC. Press to access Q.REQ. Press and the display will show OFF. Press and OFF will flash. Enter the password if required. Use either arrow key to change the QUIC value to ON and press . Quick Test mode is now active. Fol- low the same instructions for the Manual Control mode to activate a component.

Example — Test the oil solenoid circuit A (see Table 53).

Power must be applied to the unit. Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position.

Test the cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes. Test the compressor and minimum load valve solenoid (if installed) outputs in a similar manner. The minimum load valve solenoids will be turned off if there is no keypad activity for 10 minutes. Compressors will stay on until the operator turns them off. The Service Test mode will remain enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors running. All safeties are monitored during this test and will turn a compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any other mode or submode can be accessed, viewed, or changed during the Manual Control mode only. The STAT item (Run Status VIEW) will display “0” as long as the Service mode is enabled. The TEST sub-mode value must be changed back to OFF before the chiller can be switched to Enable or Remote contact for normal operation.

NOTE: There may be up to a one-minute delay before the selected item is energized.

SERVICE TEST WITH TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY — To enter the Manual Control mode with the Touch Pilot display, the unit Operating Type must be Local OFF. Use the START/STOP button on the Touch Pilot display to stop the machine if necessary. To place the unit the Service Test mode, select Main Menu STATUS Page Down SERV_TST and configure Service Test Enable to YES. Enter the pass- word if required. Configure the desired compressor output to ON. Then press the START/STOP button on the Touch Pilot dispaly and select Local on. Return to the SERV_TST screen to start and stop compressors or manually operate the compressor slide valve.

To enter the Quick Test mode, the unit Operating Type must be Local OFF. Use the START/STOP button on the Touch Pilot display to stop the machine if necessary. To place the unit in Quick Test mode select Main Menu STATUS Page Down QCK_TST1 and configure Quick Test Enable to Yes. Enter the password if required. Configure the desired output to ON, percent output or stage to confirm operation of the component.

Page 84

Table 53 — Testing Circuit A Oil Solenoid

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

MODE

(Red LED)

SERVICE TEST

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

EXPANSION

Service Test Mode

TEST Manual Sequence

QUIC Q.REQ

PASS WORD

Q.REQ

EXV.A

Press 15 times.

VALU E

DESCRIPTION

(Units)

0111

OFF

COMMENT

Password may be required

Each will lock in the next

digit. If 0111 is not the password,

use the arrow keys to change the

password digit and press

when correct.

Returns to the original field

OFF will flash

The Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch must be in the OFF position.

OLS.A Oil Solenoid cir.A

OFF

OFF will flash

OLS.A will turn on.

1 will flash

OFF

OLS.A will turn off.

LEGEND FOR FIG. 53

ALM — Isolation FIOP — Factory-Installed Option ALT — Alert HGBP — Hot Gas Bypass CB — Circuit Breaker LWT — Leaving Water Temperature CDFS — Condenser Flow Switch MBB — Main Base Board CPM — Compressor Protection Module MLV — Minimum Load Valve CPMP — Condenser Pump Relay PL — Plug CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch PMP — Pump DPT — Discharge Pressure and Temperature SGT — Saturated Gas Temperature ECEXV — Economizer Electronic Expansion Valve SHD — Loadshed ECT — Entering Cooler Temperature SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer EMM — Energy Management Module TB — Terminal Block EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

Page 85

Fig. 53 — 30XW Low Voltage Control Wiring Schematic

A30-4848

Page 86

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT DISPLAY TABLES

The Touch Pilot™ display tables are formatted in alphabetical order based on the point name description. The line number corresponds to the line number from the top the Touch Pilot screen. A cross reference to the CCN tables in Appendix C is provided. Please refer to Appendix C for range and configuration default information.

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

1 Elec Stage for backup ehs_back MAIN MENU\Config\USER 35 RW Configuration Tables\USER 3 Way Valve Position Q_3W_VLV MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 11 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 3 Way Valve Position Circuit A fc_vlv_a MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 14 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B fc_vlv_b MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 24 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit C fc_vlv_c MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 34 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL 3 Way Valve Status Circuit A FC_VLV_A MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 15 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B FC_VLV_B MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 25 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit C FC_VLV_C MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 35 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL 4 way Valve Circuit A Q_RV_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 13 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 4 way Valve Circuit B Q_RV_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 14 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 4 Way Refrigerant Valve Circuit A RV_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 24 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B RV_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 24 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C RV_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 23 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Activate ccnbroad MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 1 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS Active Capacity Override over_cap MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 20 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Active Demand Limit Val DEM_LIM MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 21 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Actual Capacity cap_t MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Actual Capacity Limit cap_lim MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 9 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Actual Chiller Current TOT_CURR MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 10 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Actual Chiller Current TOT_CURR MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 23 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT

Air Cond Enter Valve A Q_HREA_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 3 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 Air Cond Enter Valve B Q_HREA_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 7 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 Air Cond Entering Valv A hr_ea_a MAIN MENU\Status\RECLAIM 15 RO Status Display Tables\RECLAIM Air Cond Entering Valv B hr_ea_b MAIN MENU\Status\RECLAIM 25 RO Status Display Tables\RECLAIM Air Cond Leaving Valv A Q_HRLA_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 4 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 Air Cond Leaving Valv B Q_HRLA_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 8 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 Air Cond Leaving Valve A hr_la_a MAIN MENU\Status\RECLAIM 17 RO Status Display Tables\RECLAIM Air Cond Leaving Valve B hr_la_b MAIN MENU\Status\RECLAIM 27 RO Status Display Tables\RECLAIM Air Cooled Reclaim Sel recl_opt MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 10 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY Alarm Equipment Priority EQP_TYP MAIN MENU\Config\ALARMDEF 2 RW Configuration Tables\ALARMDEF\ALARMS01 Alarm Relay Output Q_ALARM MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 48 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Alarm Relay Status ALARMOUT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 28 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Alarm Routing Control ALRM_CNT MAIN MENU\Config\ALARMDEF 1 RW Configuration Tables\ALARMDEF\ALARMS01 Alarm State ALM MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 13 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Alarm System Name ALRM_NAM MAIN MENU\Config\ALARMDEF 5 RW Configuration Tables\ALARMDEF\ALARMS01 Alert Relay Output Q_ALERT MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 49 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Alert Relay Status ALERT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 29 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Auto Changeover Active Mode_12 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 13 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Auto Changeover Select auto_sel MAIN MENU\Config\USER 18 RW Configuration Tables\USER Auto Start When SM Lost auto_sm MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 18 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 AUX Board #1 Part Number AUX_BRD1 MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 4 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN AUX Board #2 Part Number AUX_BRD2 MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 5 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN AUX Board #3 Part Number AUX_BRD3 MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 6 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN AUX Board #4 Part Number AUX Board #5 Part Number AUX_BRD5 MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN Average Ctrl Water Temp ctrl_avg MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 2 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

AUX_BRD4 MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

NOTE: In places where duplicated point name descriptions were used, the headers were

added to the point name description to differentiate them. For example, the description Compressor Output is used three times for circuits A, B, and C. In this table, the descriptions include Cir A, Cir B, and Cir C.

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 87

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Ball Valve Closing Out Circuit A ISO_CL_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 22 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B ISO_CL_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 22 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C ISO_CL_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 22 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Ball Valve Opening Out Circuit A ISO_OP_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 23 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B ISO_OP_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 23 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C ISO_OP_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 23 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Ball Valve Position Circuit A ISO_REFA MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 21 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B ISO_REFB MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 21 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C ISO_REFC MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 21 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Baud rate Baud rate MAIN MENU\Config\Ctlr-ID 9 RO Configuration Tables\!CtlrID\PD5_XAXQ Brine flow Switch SP flow_sp MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 2 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Brine Freeze Setpoint lowestsp MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 3 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Broadcast acknowledger Broadcast MAIN MENU\Config\Ctlr-ID 10 RO Configuration Tables\!CtlrID\PD5_XAXQ Bus Bus MAIN MENU\Config\Ctlr-ID 7 RO Configuration Tables\!CtlrID\PD5_XAXQ CCN Chiller Start/Stop CHIL_S_S MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 5 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Chiller Capacity in0-10v Q_CATO MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 46 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Chiller Capacity Signal CAPT_010 MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 43 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Chiller Current Limit CURR_LIM MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 11 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Chiller Current Limit CURR_LIM MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 24 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Chiller in Series ll_serie MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 24 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Chiller Occupied? CHIL_OCC MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 6 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT

Chiller Ready Output Q_READY MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 41 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Chiller Running Output Q_RUN MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 42 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 CHWS Temperature CHWSTEMP MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 40 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Circuit C Heater Temp T_HEAT_C MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 38 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Circuit Loading Sequence lead_cir MAIN MENU\Config\USER 1 RW Configuration Tables\USER Comm Failure Retry Time RETRY_TM MAIN MENU\Config\ALARMDEF 3 RW Configuration Tables\ALARMDEF\ALARMS01 Comp A Must Trip Amps cpa_mtac MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 2 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Comp A S1 Config Switch (8->1) cpa_s1_c MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 3 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Comp B Must Trip Amps cpb_mtac MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 6 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Comp B S1 Config Switch (8->1) cpb_s1_c MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 7 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Comp C Must Trip Amps cpc_mtac MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 10 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Comp C S1 Config Switch (8->1) cpc_s1_c MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 11 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Compressor A Disable un_cp_a MAIN MENU\Service\CP_UNABL 2 RW Service Configuration\CP_UNABL Compressor A Hours hr_cp_a MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 7 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Compressor A Hours HR_CP_A MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 3 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Compressor A Output Q_CPA MAIN MENU\Status\SERV_TST 3 RW Status Display Tables\SERV_TST Compressor A Starts st_cp_a MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 8 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Compressor A Starts st_cp_a MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 4 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Compressor B Disable un_cp_b MAIN MENU\Service\CP_UNABL 3 RW Service Configuration\CP_UNABL Compressor B Hours hr_cp_b MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 9 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Compressor B Hours HR_CP_B MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 5 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Compressor B Output Q_CPB MAIN MENU\Status\SERV_TST 5 RW Status Display Tables\SERV_TST Compressor B Starts st_cp_b MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 10 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Compressor B Starts Compressor C Disable un_cp_c MAIN MENU\Service\CP_UNABL 4 RW Service Configuration\CP_UNABL Compressor C Hours hr_cp_c MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 11 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Compressor C Hours HR_CP_C MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 7 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Compressor C Output Q_CPC MAIN MENU\Status\SERV_TST 7 RW Status Display Tables\SERV_TST Compressor C Starts st_cp_c MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 12 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Compressor C Starts st_cp_c MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 8 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

st_cp_b MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 6 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 88

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Compressor Output Circuit A COMP_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 2 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B COMP_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 2 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C COMP_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 2 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Compressor Suction Temp Circuit A SUCT_T_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 14 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B SUCT_T_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 14 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C SUCT_T_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 14 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN Condenser Entering Fluid COND_EWT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 35 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Condenser Flow Status CONDFLOW MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 14 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Condenser Fluid Type cond_typ MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 4 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Condenser Leaving Fluid COND_LWT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 36 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Condenser Pump #1 Command HPUMP_1 MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 23 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Condenser Pump #1 Hours hr_hpum1 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 15 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Condenser Pump #1 Hours hr_hpum1 MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 11 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Condenser Pump #2 Command HPUMP_2 MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 24 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Condenser Pump #2 Hours hr_hpum2 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 16 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Condenser Pump #2 Hours hr_hpum2 MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 12 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Condenser Pump 1 Q_HPMP1 MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 39 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Condenser Pump 2 Q_HPMP2 MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 40 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Condenser Pumps Rotation Mode_17 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 18 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Condenser Pumps Sequence hpump_seq MAIN MENU\Config\USER 7 RW Configuration Tables\USER Condenser Water Val Sel cond_val MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 13 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY Control Point CTRL_PNT MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 5 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT

Control Point CTRL_PNT MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 28 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Control Type ctr_type MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 3 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Controlled Temp Error tp_error MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Controlled Water Temp CTRL_WT MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 29 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Cool Changeover Setpt cauto_sp MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 29 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Cooler Entering Fluid COOL_EWT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 33 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Entering Fluid COOL_EWT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 33 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Exchange DT Cir A pinch_a MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 6 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Cooler Exchange DT Cir B pinch_b MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 13 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Cooler Exchange DT Cir C pinch_c MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 20 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Cooler Flow Setpoint Out SET_FLOW MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 18 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Flow Switch FLOW_SW MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 12 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Fluid Type flui_typ MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 1 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Cooler Heater Active Mode_06 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 7 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Cooler Heater Command COOLHEAT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 26 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Heater Delta Spt heatersp MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 17 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Cooler Heater Output Q_CL_HT MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 36 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Cooler Heater Select heat_sel MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 12 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY Cooler Heater Temp T_HEATER MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 37 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Leaving Fluid COOL_LWT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 34 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Leaving Fluid COOL_LWT MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 34 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Pinch Ctl Point A Cooler Pinch Ctl Point B pinch_spb MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 14 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Cooler Pinch Ctl Point C pinch_spc MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 21 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Cooler Pump #1 Command CPUMP_1 MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 20 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Pump #1 Hours hr_cpum1 MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 9 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Cooler Pump #2 Command CPUMP_2 MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 21 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Pump #2 Hours hr_cpum2 MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 10 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

pinch_spa MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 89

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

Cooler Pump Run Status CPUMPDEF MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 13 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Cooler Pumps Rotation Mode_07 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 8 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Cooler Pumps Sequence cpump_seq MAIN MENU\Config\USER 8 RW Configuration Tables\USER Cooling Ice Setpoint ice_sp MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 4 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Cooling Ramp Loading cramp_sp MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 14 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Cooling Reset Deg. Value cr_deg MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 13 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Cooling Reset Select cr_sel MAIN MENU\Config\USER 19 RW Configuration Tables\USER Cooling Setpoint 1 csp1 MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 2 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Cooling Setpoint 2 csp2 MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 3 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Cooling/FreeCool Timeout fc_tmout MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 7 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL CPump 1 Ctl Delay (days) cpump1_c MAIN MENU\Service\MAINTCFG 5 RW Service Configuration Tables\MAINTCFG CPump 2 Ctl Delay (days) cpump2_c MAIN MENU\Service\MAINTCFG 6 RW Service Configuration Tables\MAINTCFG Current Alarm 1 alarm_1 MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 14 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Current Alarm 2 alarm_2 MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 15 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Current Alarm 3 alarm_3 MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 16 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Current Alarm 4 alarm_4 MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 17 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Current Alarm 5 alarm_5 MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 18 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Current At 100% Load A cur100_a MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 15 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Current At 100% Load B cur100_b MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 16 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Current At 100% Load C cur100_c MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 17 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Current At 30% Load A cur_30_a MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 12 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Current At 30% Load B cur_30_b MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 13 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Current At 30% Load C cur_30_c MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 14 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Current Control on_ctrl MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 4 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Current Cooling Power cool_pwr MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 4 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Current Full Reset Value v_cr_fu MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 10 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Current Full Reset Value v_hr_fu MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 24 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT

Current Limit at 100% curr_ful MAIN MENU\Config\USER 31 RW Configuration Tables\USER Current Limit Select curr_sel MAIN MENU\Config\USER 30 RW Configuration Tables\USER Current Mode (1=occup.) MODE MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S 1 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S Current Mode (1=occup.) MODE MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S 1 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S Current No Reset Value v_cr_no MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 9 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Current No Reset Value v_hr_no MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 23 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Current Occup Period # PER-NO MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S 2 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S Current Occup Period # PER-NO MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S 2 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S Current Occupied Time STRTTIME MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S 5 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S Current Occupied Time STRTTIME MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S 5 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S Current Phase 1 Comp A cpa_cur1 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 1 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE Current Phase 1 Comp B cpb_cur1 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 4 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE Current Phase 1 Comp C cpc_cur1 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE Current Phase 2 Comp A cpa_cur2 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 2 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE Current Phase 2 Comp B cpb_cur2 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 5 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE Current Phase 2 Comp C cpc_cur2 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE Current Phase 3 Comp A cpa_cur3 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 3 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE Current Phase 3 Comp B cpb_cur3 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 6 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE Current Phase 3 Comp C cpc_cur3 MAIN MENU\Maint\CUR_PHAS 9 RO Maintenance Display Tables\CUR_PHASE

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/

WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 90

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Current Setpoint SP MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 31 RW Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Current Unoccupied Time ENDTIME MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S 6 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S Current Unoccupied Time ENDTIME MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S 6 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S Current Z Multiplier Val zm MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 18 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Customer Shutdown Out Q_SHUT MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 47 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Daylight Sav Ent Day of Week (1=Monday) startdow MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 10 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS Daylight Sav Ent Month startmon MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 9 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS Daylight Sav Ent Week of Month startwom MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 11 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS Daylight Sav Leaving Day of Week (1=Monday) stopdow MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 14 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS Daylight Sav Leaving Month stopmon MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 13 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS Daylight Sav Leaving Week of Month stopwom MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 15 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS Daylight Saving Select dayl_sel MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 7 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS Decription DevDesc MAIN MENU\Config\Ctlr-ID 1 RW Configuration Tables\!CtlrID\PD5_XAXQ Defrost Active On Cir A Mode_19 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 20 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Defrost Active On Cir B Mode_20 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 21 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Defrost Active? Circuit A mode[19] MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 4 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B mode[20] MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 21 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Defrost Duration Circuit A defr_dua MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 6 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B defr_dub MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 23 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Defrost Fan Offset Cal A def_of_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 16 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Defrost Fan Offset Cal B def_of_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 33 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM

Defrost Fan Start Cal A def_ca_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 15 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Defrost Fan Start Cal B def_ca_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 32 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Defrost Number Circuit A nb_def_a MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 6 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B nb_def_b MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 7 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Defrost Number Circuit A nb_def_a MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 3 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B nb_def_b MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 4 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Defrost Temperature Circuit A DEFRT_A MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 5 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B DEFRT_B MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 22 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Delta - Reference Delta Circuit A delt_v_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 13 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B delt_v_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 30 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Delta: OAT - Mean SST Circuit A delt_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 11 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B delt_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 28 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Delta T Full Reset Value dt_cr_fu MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 8 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Delta T Full Reset Value dt_hr_fu MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 22 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Delta T No Reset Value dt_cr_no MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 7 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT Delta T No Reset Value dt_hr_no MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 21 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT

Demand Limit Active Mode_04 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 5 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Demand Limit Type Select lim_sel MAIN MENU\Config\USER 24 RW Configuration Tables\USER Deri PID Gain Varifan hd_dg MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 8 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 DGT Cool Solenoid Circuit A Q_CDGT_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 21 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit B Q_CDGT_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 28 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit C Q_CDGT_C MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 9 RO Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 91

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

DGT Cooling Solenoid Circuit A GASCOOLA MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 8 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B GASCOOLB MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 8 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C GASCOOLC MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 8 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Discharge Gas Temp Circuit A DGT_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 10 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B DGT_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 10 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C DGT_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 10 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN Discharge Pressure Circuit A DP_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 3 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B DP_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 3 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C DP_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 3 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN Differential Water Temp diff_wt MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 3 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Discharge A Gas Limit sdtlim_a MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 3 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge A Temp Average sdt_m_a MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 1 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge A Temp Rate sdt_mr_a MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 2 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge B Gas Limit sdtlim_b MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge B Temp Average sdt_m_b MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 5 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge B Temp Rate sdt_mr_b MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 6 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge C Gas Limit sdtlim_c MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 11 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge C Temp Average sdt_m_c MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 9 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge C Temp Rate sdt_mr_c MAIN MENU\Maint\PR_LIMIT 10 RO Maintenance Display Tables\PR_LIMIT Discharge Superheat A DSH_A MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 3 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Discharge Superheat B DSH_B MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 10 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Discharge Superheat C DSH_C MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 17 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL DLY 3 - Cooler Pump 1 (days) cpump1_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 10 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT DLY 4 - Cooler Pump 2 (days) cpump2_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 11 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT DLY 5 - Condenser Pump 1 (days) hpump1_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 12 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT

DLY 6 - Condenser Pump 2 (days) hpump2_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 13 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT DLY 7 - Water Filter (days) wfilte_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 14 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT DLY 8 - Cp A Oil Filter (days) ofilta_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 15 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT DLY 9 - Cp B Oil Filter (days) ofiltb_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 16 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT DLY 10 - Cp C Oil Filter (days) ofiltc_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 17 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT Economizer A Steps Numb eco_cnfa MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 22 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Economizer B Steps Numb eco_cnfb MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 23 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Economizer C Steps Numb eco_cnfc MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 24 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 Economizer Position A EXV_EC_A MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 25 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Economizer Position B EXV_EC_B MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 29 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Economizer Position C EXV_EC_C MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 33 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Economizer SH Setpoint A ecsh_spa MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 27 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Economizer SH Setpoint A esh_sp_a MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 21 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Economizer SH Setpoint B ecsh_spb MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 31 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Economizer SH Setpoint B esh_sp_b MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 22 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Economizer SH Setpoint C ecsh_spc MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 35 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Economizer SH Setpoint C esh_sp_c MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 23 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Economizer Superheat A Economizer Superheat B eco_shb MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 30 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Economizer Superheat C eco_shc MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 34 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL Economizer EXV Pos Circuit A Q_ECO_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 6 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit B Q_ECO_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 7 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit C Q_ECO_C MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 8 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

eco_sha MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 26 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/

WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 92

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Economizer Gas Temp Circuit A ECO_TP_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 11 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B ECO_TP_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 11 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C ECO_TP_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 11 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN Economizer Pressure Circuit A ECON_P_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 5 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B ECON_P_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 5 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C ECON_P_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 5 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN EHS Ctrl Override over_ehs MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 22 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Elec Stage OAT Threshold ehs_th MAIN MENU\Config\USER 34 RW Configuration Tables\USER Electric Heat Active Mode_15 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 16 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Electrical Box Interlock ELEC_BOX MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 16 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Electrical Heat Stage EHS_STEP MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 19 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Electrical Heat Stages ehs_sel MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 16 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY Electrical Pulldown Time ehs_pull MAIN MENU\Config\USER 36 RW Configuration Tables\USER Electrical Pulldown? ehspulld MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 24 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Element Element MAIN MENU\Config\Ctlr-ID 8 RO Configuration Tables\!CtlrID\PD5_XAXQ Emergency Stop EMSTOP MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 32 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT EMM NRCP2 Board EMM_NRCP MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 9 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN Energy Management Module emm_nrcp MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 17 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY Entering Fluid Control ewt_opt MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 5 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Estimated FreeCool Power fc_pwr MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 5 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Exchanger Frost Factor Circuit A frost_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 2 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM

Circuit B frost_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 19 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM External Temperature OAT MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 30 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT EXV A Maximum Steps Numb exva_max MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 18 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 EXV A Superheat Setpoint sh_sp_a MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 9 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 EXV B Maximum Steps Numb exvb_max MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 19 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 EXV B Superheat Setpoint sh_sp_b MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 10 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 EXV Board Circuit A EXV_BRD1 MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 1 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN EXV Board Circuit B EXV_BRD2 MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 2 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN EXV Board Circuit C EXV_BRD3 MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 3 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN EXV C Maximum Steps Numb exvc_max MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY2 20 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY2 EXV C Superheat Setpoint sh_sp_c MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 11 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 EXV MOP Setpoint mop_sp MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 15 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 EXV Override Circuit A oc_eco_a MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 28 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Override Circuit A ov_exv_a MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Override Circuit B oc_eco_b MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 32 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Override Circuit B ov_exv_b MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 15 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Override Circuit C oc_eco_c MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 36 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Override Circuit C ov_exv_c MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 22 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Position Circuit A EXV_A MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 2 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Position Circuit B EXV_B MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 9 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Position Circuit C EXV_C MAIN MENU\Maint\EXV_CTRL 16 RO Maintenance Display Tables\EXV_CTRL EXV Position Circuit A Q_EXVA MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 3 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit B Q_EXVB MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 4 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit C EXV Position Circuit A EXV_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 15 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B EXV_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 15 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C EXV_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 15 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

Q_EXVC MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 5 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 93

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

EXV Position Circuit A EXV_A MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 20 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B EXV_B MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 30 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit C EXV_C MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 40 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Factory Password fac_pass MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 19 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY Fan #1 Hours Circuit A hr_fana1 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 8 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb1 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 18 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc1 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 28 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #1 Hours Circuit A hr_fana1 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 5 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb1 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 15 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hr_fanc1 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 25 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Fan #2 Hours Circuit A hr_fana2 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 9 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb2 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 19 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc2 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 29 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #2 Hours Circuit A hr_fana2 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 6 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb2 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 16 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hr_fanc2 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 26 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Fan #3 Hours Circuit A hr_fana3 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 10 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb3 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 20 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc3 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 30 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #3 Hours Circuit A hr_fana3 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 7 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb3 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 17 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS

Circuit C hr_fanc3 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 27 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Fan #4 Hours Circuit A hr_fana4 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 11 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb4 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 21 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc4 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 31 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #4 Hours Circuit A hr_fana4 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 8 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb4 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 18 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hr_fanc4 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 28 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Fan #5 Hours Circuit A hr_fana5 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 12 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb5 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 22 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc5 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 32 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #5 Hours Circuit A hr_fana5 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 9 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb5 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 19 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hr_fanc5 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 29 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Fan #6 Hours Circuit A hr_fana6 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 13 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb6 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 23 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc6 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 33 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #6 Hours Circuit A hr_fana6 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 10 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb6 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 20 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hr_fanc6 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 30 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/

WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 94

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Fan #7 Hours Circuit A hr_fana7 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 14 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb7 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 24 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc7 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 34 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #7 Hours Circuit A hr_fana7 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 11 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb7 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 21 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hr_fanc7 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 31 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Fan #8 Hours Circuit A hr_fana8 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 15 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb8 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 25 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc8 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 35 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #8 Hours Circuit A hr_fana8 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 12 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb8 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 22 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hr_fanc8 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 32 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Fan #9 Hours Circuit A hr_fana9 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 16 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hr_fanb9 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 26 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hr_fanc9 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 36 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #9 Hours Circuit A hr_fana9 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 13 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hr_fanb9 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 23 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hr_fanc9 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 33 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS

Fan #10 Hours Circuit A hrfana10 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 17 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit B hrfanb10 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 27 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Circuit C hrfanc10 MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 37 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Fan #10 Hours Circuit A hrfana10 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 14 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit B hrfanb10 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 24 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Circuit C hrfanc10 MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 34 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Fan Cycle Counter Circuit A fancyc_a MAIN MENU\Maint\FANCTRL 3 RO Maintenance Display Tables\FANCTRL Circuit B fancyc_b MAIN MENU\Maint\FANCTRL 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\FANCTRL Circuit C fancyc_c MAIN MENU\Maint\FANCTRL 11 RO Maintenance Display Tables\FANCTRL Fan Output DO #1 Circuit A fan_a1 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 11 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B fan_b1 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 11 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C fan_c1 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 11 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Fan Output DO #2 Circuit A fan_a2 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 12 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B fan_b2 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 12 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C fan_c2 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 12 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Fan Output DO #3 Circuit A fan_a3 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 13 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B fan_b3 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 13 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C fan_c3 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 13 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Fan Output DO #4 Circuit A fan_a4 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 14 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B fan_b4 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 14 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C fan_c4 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 14 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/

WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 95

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

Fan Output DO #5 Circuit A fan_a5 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 15 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B fan_b5 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 15 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D

Circuit C Fan Output DO #6

Circuit A fan_a6 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 16 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B fan_b6 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 16 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D

Circuit C Fan Output DO #7

Circuit A fan_a7 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 17 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B fan_b7 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 17 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D

Circuit C Fan Output DO #8

Circuit A fan_a7 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 17 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B fan_b7 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 17 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D

Circuit C Fan Sequence Started?

Circuit A def_fa_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B def_fa_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 24 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Fan Stages Circuit A Q_FAN_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 9 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit B Q_FAN_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 10 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit C Q_FAN_C MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 11 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Fan Staging Number Circuit A FAN_ST_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 19 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B FAN_ST_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 19 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D

Circuit C FAN_ST_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 19 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Fan Staging Number Circuit A FAN_ST_A MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 13 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B FAN_ST_B MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 23 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit C FAN_ST_C MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 33 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Flow Checked if C Pump Off pump_loc MAIN MENU\Config\USER 17 RW Configuration Tables\USER Free Cool A Ball Valve Q_FCBVL_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 18 RO Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 Free Cool A EXV Position Q_FCEXVA MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 16 RO Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 Free Cool B Ball Valve Q_FCBVL_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 19 RO Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 Free Cool B EXV Position Q_FCEXVB MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 17 RO Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2 Free Cool Conditions OK? fc_ready MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 8 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Free Cool Pump A Hours hr_fcm_a MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 1 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Free Cool Pump B Hours hr_fcm_b MAIN MENU\Status\FANHOURS 2 RO Status Display Tables\FANHOURS Free Cool Request? fc_reqst MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 9 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Free Cooling A Pump Hours hr_fcp_a MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 4 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Free Cooling Active Mode_13 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 14 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Free Cooling Active Circuit A FC_ON_A MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 12 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B FC_ON_B MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 22 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit C FC_ON_C MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 32 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Free Cooling B Pump Hours hr_fcp_b MAIN MENU\Service\UPDHRFAN 5 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDHRFAN Free Cooling Disable FC_DSBLE MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 12 RW Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Free Cooling Disable Sw FC_SW MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 6 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Free Cooling Disable? FC_DSBLE MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 2 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Free Cooling Heater Free Cooling OAT Limit free_oat MAIN MENU\Config\USER 33 RW Configuration Tables\USER Free Cooling Select freecool MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 11 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

fan_c5 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 15 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D

fan_c6 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 16 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D

fan_c7 MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 17 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D

Q_FC_HTR MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 15 RO Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 96

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

Frost Integrator Gain

Circuit A fr_int_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 14 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM

Circuit B fr_int_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 31 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM

Head Press Speed

Circuit A Q_VFANA MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 12 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

Circuit B Q_VFANB MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 13 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

Circuit C Q_VFANC MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 14 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

HEAT RECLAIM CIRCUIT A — MAIN MENU\Status\RECLAIM 9 RO Status Display Tables\RECLAIM

HEAT RECLAIM CIRCUIT B — MAIN MENU\Status\RECLAIM 19 RO Status Display Tables\RECLAIM

Heat Reclaim Select RECL_SEL MAIN MENU\Status\RECLAIM 1 RO Status Display Tables\RECLAIM

Heat Reclaim Select RECL_SET MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 11 RW Status Display Tables\GENUNIT

Heat/Cool Select HC_SEL MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 9 RW Status Display Tables\GENUNIT

Heat/Cool Status HEATCOOL MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 8 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT

Heating Changeover Setpt hauto_sp MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 30 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT

Heating Low EWT Lockout Mode_16 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 17 RO Status Display Tables\MODES

Heating OAT Threshold heat_th MAIN MENU\Config\USER 32 RW Configuration Tables\USER

Heating Ramp Loading hramp_sp MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 26 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT

Heating Reset Deg. Value hr_deg MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 25 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT

Heating Reset Select hr_sel MAIN MENU\Config\USER 20 RW Configuration Tables\USER

Heating Setpoint 1 hsp1 MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 17 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT

Heating Setpoint 2 hsp2 MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 18 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT

High DGT Circuit A Mode_24 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 25 RO Status Display Tables\MODES

High DGT Circuit B Mode_25 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 26 RO Status Display Tables\MODES

High DGT Circuit C Mode_26 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 27 RO Status Display Tables\MODES

High Pres Override Cir A Mode_27 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 28 RO Status Display Tables\MODES

High Pres Override Cir B Mode_28 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 29 RO Status Display Tables\MODES

High Pres Override Cir C Mode_29 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 30 RO Status Display Tables\MODES

High Pressure Threshold hp_th MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 16 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1

High Tiers Display Selec highdisp MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 18 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY

Holiday Duration (days) HOL-LEN MAIN MENU\Config\HOLIDAY\HOLDY_01 3 RW Configuration Tables\HOLIDAY\HOLDY_01

Holiday Start Day HOL-DAY MAIN MENU\Config\HOLIDAY\HOLDY_01 2 RW Configuration Tables\HOLIDAY\HOLDY_01

Holiday Start Month HOL-MON MAIN MENU\Config\HOLIDAY\HOLDY_01 1 RW Configuration Tables\HOLIDAY\HOLDY_01

Hot Gas Bypass Select hgbp_sel MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 14 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY

Head Press Actuator Pos

Circuit A hd_pos_a MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 16 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN

Circuit B hd_pos_b MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 16 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN

Circuit C hd_pos_c MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 16 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN

Heater Ball Valve

Circuit A Q_BVL_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 19 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

Circuit B Q_BVL_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 26 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

Circuit C Q_BVL_C MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 33 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

Hot Gas Bypass Output

Circuit A HGBP_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 9 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D

Circuit B HGBP_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 9 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D

Circuit C HGBP_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 9 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D

Hot Gas Bypass

Circuit A Q_HGBP_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 20 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

Circuit B Q_HGBP_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 27 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

Circuit C Q_HGBP_C MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 34 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1

HPump 1 Ctl Delay (days) hpump1_c MAIN MENU\Service\MAINTCFG 7 RW Service Configuration Tables\MAINTCFG

HPump 2 Ctl Delay (days) hpump2_c MAIN MENU\Service\MAINTCFG 8 RW Service Configuration Tables\MAINTCFG

HR Condenser Heater Q_CD_HT MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST2 12 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST2

Ice Done Storage Switch ICE_SW MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 11 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN

Ice Mode Enable ice_cnfg MAIN MENU\Config\USER 42 RW Configuration Tables\USER

Ice Mode in Effect Mode_18 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 19 RO Status Display Tables\MODES

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 97

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

Int PID Gain Varifan hd_ig MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 7 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Lag Capacity Limit Value LAG_LIM MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 22 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Lag Minimum Running Time lag_mini MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 20 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Lag Start Delay l_strt_d MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE Lag Start Timer lstr_tim MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 17 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Lag Unit Pump Control lag_pump MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 21 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Language Selection LANGUAGE MAIN MENU\Config\DISPCONF 2 RW Configuration Tables\DISPCONF Lead Lag Select lead_sel MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 12 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Lead Pulldown Time lead_pul MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 18 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Lead Pulldown? ll_pull MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 11 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE Lead Unit is the: lead_sel MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 5 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE Lead/Lad Changeover? ll_chang MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 10 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE Lead/Lag Balance Delta ll_bal_d MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 16 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Lead/Lag Hours Delta ll_hr_d MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 9 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE Limit 4-20mA Signal LIM_ANAL MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 42 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Limit Switch 1 Status LIM_SW1 MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 8 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Limit Switch 2 Status LIM_SW2 MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 9 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Load/Unload Factor smz MAIN MENU\Maint\LOADFACT 19 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LOADFACT Location Location MAIN MENU\Config\Ctlr-ID 2 RO Configuration Tables\!CtlrID\PD5_XAXQ Low Suction Circuit A Mode_21 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 22 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Low Suction Circuit B Mode_22 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 23 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Low Suction Circuit C Mode_23 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 24 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Low Superheat Circuit A Mode_30 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 31 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Low Superheat Circuit B Mode_31 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 32 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Low Superheat Circuit C Mode_32 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 33 RO Status Display Tables\MODES LWT-OAT D e lta fc_delta MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 3 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL mA For 0% Demand Limit lim_ze MAIN MENU\Config\USER 29 RW Configuration Tables\USER

mA For 100% Demand Limit lim_mx MAIN MENU\Config\USER 28 RW Configuration Tables\USER Machine Operating Hours hr_mach MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 5 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Machine Operating Hours HR_MACH MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 1 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Machine Starts st_mach MAIN MENU\Service\UPDTHOUR 6 RW Service Configuration Tables\UPDTHOUR Machine Starts Number st_mach MAIN MENU\Status\STRTHOUR 2 RO Status Display Tables\STRTHOUR Master Control Type ms_ctrl MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 7 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Master Control Type ms_ctrl MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 3 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE Master Slave Active Mode_11 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 12 RO Status Display Tables\MODES Master/Slave Ctrl Active ms_activ MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 4 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE Master/Slave Error ms_error MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 12 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE Master/Slave Select ms_sel MAIN MENU\Config\MST_SLV 3 RW Configuration Tables\MST_SLV Max Available Capacity? cap_max MAIN MENU\Maint\M_MSTSLV 13 RO Maintenance Display Tables\MSTSLAVE MCHX Exchanger Select mchx_sel MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 15 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY Metric Display on STDU DISPUNIT MAIN MENU\Config\DISPCONF 1 RW Configuration Tables\DISPCONF Minutes Left for Start min_left MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 7 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Model Number ModelNum MAIN MENU\Config\Ctlr-ID 4 RO Configuration Tables\!CtlrID\PD5_XAXQ Must Trip Amps cpa_mtam MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 12 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN Must Trip Amps cpb_mtam MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 16 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN Must Trip Amps Mean SST Calculation Circuit A sst_dm_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 10 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B sst_dm_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 27 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Motor Current Circuit A CURREN_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 8 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B CURREN_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 8 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C CURREN_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 8 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

cpc_mtam MAIN MENU\Maint\BOARD_PN 20 RO Maintenance Display Tables\BOARD_PN

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/

WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 98

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

Motor Temperature Circuit A CP_TMP_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 9 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B CP_TMP_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 9 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C CP_TMP_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 9 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN Next Sequence Allowed in Circuit A def_se_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 20 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B def_se_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 20 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Oil Heater Circuit A Q_HT_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 15 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit B Q_HT_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 22 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit C Q_HT_C MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 29 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Oil Heater Output Circuit A OIL_HT_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 5 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B OIL_HT_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 5 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C OIL_HT_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 5 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Oil Level Input Circuit A OIL_L_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 7 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B OIL_L_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 7 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C OIL_L_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 7 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Oil Pressure Circuit A OP_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 6 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B OP_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 6 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C OP_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 6 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN

Oil Pressure Difference Circuit A DOP_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 7 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B DOP_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 7 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C DOP_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 7 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN Oil Solenoid Circuit A Q_OILS_A MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 16 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit B Q_OILS_B MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 23 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Circuit C Q_OILS_C MAIN MENU\Status\QCK_TST1 30 RW Status Display Tables\QCK_TST1 Oil Solenoid Output Circuit A OIL_SL_A MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_D 6 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_D Circuit B OIL_SL_B MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_D 6 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_D Circuit C OIL_SL_C MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_D 6 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_D Optimal Fan Count Circuit A fancop_a MAIN MENU\Maint\FANCTRL 4 RO Maintenance Display Tables\FANCTRL Circuit B fancop_b MAIN MENU\Maint\FANCTRL 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\FANCTRL Circuit C fancop_c MAIN MENU\Maint\FANCTRL 12 RO Maintenance Display Tables\FANCTRL Override State Circuit A over_d_a MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Circuit B over_d_b MAIN MENU\Maint\DEFROSTM 25 RO Maintenance Display Tables\DEFROSTM Percent Total Capacity Circuit A CAPA_T MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCA_AN 2 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCA_AN Circuit B CAPB_T MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCB_AN 2 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCB_AN Circuit C CAPC_T MAIN MENU\Status\CIRCC_AN 2 RO Status Display Tables\CIRCC_AN Pump Differential Press. Circuit A fc_dp_a MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 19 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B fc_dp_b MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 29 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit C fc_dp_c MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 39 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Pump Inlet Pressure Circuit A fc_inp_a MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 17 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B fc_inp_b MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 27 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/

WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 99

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

Pump Inlet Pressure Circuit A fc_inp_a MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 17 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B fc_inp_b MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 27 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit C fc_inp_c MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 37 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Pump Outlet Pressure Circuit A fc_oup_a MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 18 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit B fc_oup_b MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 28 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Circuit C fc_oup_c MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 38 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL NB Fans on Varifan Cir A varfan_a MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 5 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY NB Fans on Varifan Cir B varfan_b MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 6 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY NB Fans on Varifan Cir C varfan_c MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 7 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY Next Occupied Day NXTOCDAY MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S Next Occupied Day NXTOCDAY MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S Next Occupied Time NXTOCTIM MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S Next Occupied Time NXTOCTIM MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S Next Session Allowed In fc_next MAIN MENU\Status\FREECOOL 6 RO Status Display Tables\FREECOOL Next Unoccupied Day NXTUNDAY MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S 9 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S Next Unoccupied Day NXTUNDAY MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S 9 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S Next Unoccupied Time NXTUNTIM MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S 10 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC1PO1S Next Unoccupied Time NXTUNTIM MAIN MENU\Maint\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S 10 RO Maintenance Display Tables\OCCDEFCM\OCC2PO2S Night Control Capacity Limit nh_limit MAIN MENU\Config\USER 41 RW Configuration Tables\USER Night Control End Hour nh_end MAIN MENU\Config\USER 40 RW Configuration Tables\USER Night Control Start Hour nh_start MAIN MENU\Config\USER 39 RW Configuration Tables\USER Night Low Noise Active Mode_09 MAIN MENU\Status\MODES 10 RO Status Display Tables\MODES OAT Broadcast Bus # oatbusnm MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 4 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS OAT Broadcast Element # oatlocad MAIN MENU\Config\BRODEFS 5 RW Configuration Tables\BRODEFS\BROCASTS

OAT Full Reset Value oatcr_fu MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 6 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT OAT Full Reset Value oathr_fu MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 20 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT OAT No Reset Value oatcr_no MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 5 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT OAT No Reset Value oathr_no MAIN MENU\Setpoint\SETPOINT 19 RW Setpoint Configuration Tables\SETPOINT

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Page 100

APPENDIX A — TOUCH PILOT™ DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TOUCH PILOT DESCRIPTION

Occupied From OCCTOD# MAIN MENU\Schedule\OCCPC01S 3 RO Configuration Tables\OCCPC01S Occupied Override Switch OCC_OVSW MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 10 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Occupied To UNOCTOD# MAIN MENU\Schedule\OCCPC01S 4 RO Configuration Tables\OCCPC01S Oil Filter A Ctrl (days) oilfil_a MAIN MENU\Service\MAINTCFG 10 RW Service Configuration Tables\MAINTCFG Oil Filter B Ctrl (days) oilfil_b MAIN MENU\Service\MAINTCFG 11 RW Service Configuration Tables\MAINTCFG Oil Filter C Ctrl (days) oilfil_c MAIN MENU\Service\MAINTCFG 12 RW Service Configuration Tables\MAINTCFG On/Off - Remote Switch ONOFF_SW MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 2 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN OP WARN 1- Refrigerant Charge charge_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 6 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT OP WARN 2 - Water Loop Size wloop_m MAIN MENU\Maint\SERMAINT 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\SERMAINT Operating Type OPER_TYP MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 2 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Optional Space temp SPACETMP MAIN MENU\Status\STATEGEN 39 RO Status Display Tables\STATEGEN Pass for All User Config all_pass MAIN MENU\Config\USER 44 RW Configuration Tables\USER Percent Total Capacity CAP_T MAIN MENU\Status\GENUNIT 20 RO Status Display Tables\GENUNIT Period # DOW (MTWTFSSH) DOW# MAIN MENU\Schedule\OCCPC01S 2 RO Configuration Tables\OCCPC01S Pinch offset circuit A p_ofst_a MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 12 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Pinch offset circuit B p_ofst_b MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 13 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Pinch offset circuit C p_ofst_c MAIN MENU\Service\SERVICE1 14 RW Service Configuration Tables\SERVICE1 Power Down 1: day-mon-year date_of1 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 3 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Down 1: hour-minute time_of1 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 4 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Down 2: day-mon-year date_of2 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 7 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Down 2: hour-minute time_of2 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 8 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Down 3: day-mon-year date_of3 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 11 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR

100

Power Down 3: hour-minute time_of3 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 12 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Down 4: day-mon-year date_of4 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 15 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Down 4: hour-minute time_of4 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 16 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Down 5: day-mon-year date_of5 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 19 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Down 5: hour-minute time_of5 MAIN MENU\Maint\LAST_POR 20 RO Maintenance Display Tables\LAST_POR Power Frequency 60HZ Sel freq_60H MAIN MENU\Service\FACTORY 3 RW Service Configuration Tables\FACTORY

LEGEND

RO — Read Only RW — Read/Write

TOUCH PILOT

POINT NAME

TOUCH PILOT PATH LINE

READ/ WRITE

CCN TABLE NAME

Carrier 30XW150-400 User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual